Nortel Networks Server 553 3001 358 User Manual

553-3001-358/555-4001-135  
Nortel Communication Server 1000/  
Nortel Communication Server 2100/Meridian SL-100  
Nortel Integrated Conference  
Bridge  
Service Implementation Guide  
ICB Release 4 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Test this out  
Nortel Communication Server 1000/  
Nortel Communication Server 2100/Meridian SL-100  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge  
Service Implementation Guide  
Publication number: 553-3001-358/555-4001-135  
Product release: ICB Release 4  
Document release: Standard 02.00  
Date: July 2006  
Copyright © 2006 Nortel Networks. All rights reserved.  
Produced in Canada  
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. The statements, configurations, technical data, and recom-  
mendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable, but are presented without express or implied warranty.  
Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document. The information in this docu-  
ment is proprietary to Nortel Networks.  
Nortel, Nortel (Logo), the Globemark, SL-1, Meridian 1, and Succession are trademarks of Nortel Networks.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Publication history  
July 2006  
Standard 02.00 ICB Release 4. This document is up-issued to address  
using the CLI” on page 71, the default password is blank.  
July 2004  
Standard 01.00, ICB Release 4.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 Publication history  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
viii Contents  
Installing the NTCW84JA I/O Panel Filter Connector for a Large  
System 47  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents ix  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
x Contents  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents xi  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
xii Contents  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13  
About this document  
Purpose and audience  
This document instructs system administrators and installers how to  
install, configure, operate, and maintain the Nortel Networks Integrated  
Conference Bridge as a part of the overall Meridian system. In this  
guide, Meridian system refers to either the Meridian 1, Nortel Networks  
Communication Server 1000, or the Communication Server  
2100/Meridian SL-100 switch. The Integrated Conference Bridge (ICB)  
card allows you to schedule and configure multiple simultaneous  
conferences.  
You can install the ICB card in either the Meridian 1, Communication  
Server 1000 (CS 1000), or CS 2100/Meridian SL-100. In the majority of  
places the ICB operates the same way regardless of the system in  
which you install it. When the information differs between the systems,  
this guide contains separate sections for the Meridian 1 and CS 1000,  
and the CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 (for example, configuration  
information).  
Structure  
This document contains the following sections:  
“Product description” on page 17 – describes how the ICB  
operates and the conference features it provides, as well as the card  
hardware and software characteristics.  
“Engineering guidelines” on page 35 – describes ICB system  
resource allocation, and software and hardware requirements.  
prepare the system for installation, install the ICB card, connect the  
ICB to the administration terminal, and configure the ICB. This  
chapter contains separate configuration sections for the Meridian 1  
and CS 1000, and the CS 2100/Meridian SL-100.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
14 About this document  
“Browser user interface” on page 79 – describes how to use the  
browser user interface (BUI), a web-based server, for conference  
administration and scheduling, as well as user administration and  
maintenance of the ICB.  
“Telephone user interface” on page 135 – describes how to use  
the telephone user interface (TUI) for simple conference  
reservation, as well as lists commands available to participants  
during an active conference.  
“Microsoft Outlook GUI” on page 151 – describes how to use the  
Microsoft Outlook GUI for audio conference reservations.  
“Maintenance” on page 169 – shows how to perform maintenance  
and troubleshooting operations. Includes a description of the  
Command Line Interface (CLI).  
“Reports” on page 195 – introduces the reports that the ICB can  
generate and describes billing.  
“Upgrades” on page 211 – provides procedures for upgrading to  
ICB Release 4 from previous releases.  
password protection and access restrictions.  
environmental specifications and shows regulatory standards.  
“List of terms” on page 237 – describes the terms used in this  
guide.  
How to check the version and issue of this document  
The version and issue of the document are indicated by numbers (for  
example, 00.03).  
The first two digits indicate the version. The version number increases  
each time the document is updated to support a new software release.  
For example, the first release of a document is 01.01. In the next  
software release cycle, the first release of the same document is 02.01.  
The second two digits indicate the issue. The issue number increases  
each time the document is revised, but re-released in the same  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About this document 15  
software release cycle. For example, the second release of a document  
in the same software release cycle is 01.02.  
FOR MORE INFORMATION  
To determine whether you have the latest version of this  
document and how documentation for your product is  
organized, check the release information in the Meridian 1  
Library Navigator or the Meridian SL-100 Master Index of  
Publications.  
References in this document  
Nortel Networks Communication Server 1000  
If you are installing the ICB in a Communication Server 1000, see the  
following documents for additional information:  
Large System Management, 553-3021-500  
Large System Planning, 553-3021-120  
Transmission Parameters, 553-3001-182  
Call Detail Recording, 553-3001-100  
Input/Output Administration, 553-3001-311  
Features and Services, 553-3001-306  
Nortel Networks Communication Server 1000S  
If you are installing the ICB in a Communication Server 1000S, see the  
following documents for additional information:  
Planning and Installation Guide, 553-3031-120  
Installation and Configuration Guide, 553-3031-210  
Maintenance Guide, 553-3031-500  
CS 2100 or Meridian SL-100  
If you are installing the ICB in a CS 2100/Meridian SL-100, see the  
following documents for additional information:  
IPE Reference Manual, 555-4001-129  
Alarm Clearing Procedures, 555-4031-543  
Routine Maintenance Procedures, 555-4031-546  
Card Replacement Procedures, 555-4031-547  
Log Report Reference Manual, 555-4031-840  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16 About this document  
End user documentation  
The following documents apply to all platforms:  
Nortel Networks Integrated Conference Bridge Release 4 User  
Guide, P0989944 – shows end user how to schedule and manage  
a conference using either the Telephone User Interface or the  
Browser User Interface.  
Nortel Networks Integrated Conference Bridge Release 4 Quick  
Reference Card, P0989945 – provides a list of Telephone User  
Interface commands; comes in a package of 20.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17  
Product description  
Purpose  
This chapter describes the functional and physical characteristics of the  
Nortel Networks Integrated Conference Bridge Release 4. Technicians  
can install the Integrated Conference Bridge (ICB) card in either a  
Meridian 1, Nortel Networks Communication Server 1000, Meridian  
SL-100, or Nortel Networks Communication Server 2100. This guide  
uses the term “Meridian system” to refer to either the Meridian 1,  
Meridian SL-100, Communication Server 1000 (CS 1000), or CS 2100.  
The chapter contains the following sections:  
“ICB description” on page 17 – describes the ICB card and the  
role it plays in conference calls. Summarizes ICB features and  
services.  
“Hardware overview” on page 21 – describes the hardware  
components of the ICB system.  
“ICB operation” on page 27 – shows how ICB conferences  
operate.  
ICB description  
Conference administration  
The ICB card allows users to schedule and administer multiple  
simultaneous conferences. Schedule conferences based on  
time-of-day, duration of each conference, and number of individuals  
(conferees) participating in, or ports allocated, for each conference.  
Schedule a conference using one of the following:  
Browser user interface – point and click web-page application  
Telephone user interface – telephone keypad entries  
Microsoft Outlook GUI – Microsoft Office Outlook graphical user  
interface (GUI)  
• Ad hoc meeting – audio conference created now  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
18 Product description  
The ICB card provides announcements and tones that relate to specific  
events during conferences. These events include the following:  
• advising the chairperson and conferees of the status of the  
conference connection  
• indicating when a conferee joins or leaves the conference, and  
• warning the chairperson and the conferees when the conference is  
about to expire.  
Technicians can install multiple ICB cards into:  
• a Media Gateway chassis shelf for a CS 1000  
• an Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) shelf for a Meridian 1/CS  
1000  
• an Option 11 shelf  
• an IPE shelf for a CS 2100/Meridian SL-100  
Each ICB card can operate independently, providing up to 32 ports for  
a single conference. The ICB card can support up to ten simultaneous,  
separate conferences.  
When users establish a single-card conference, they use the 32 ports  
on the card. If two conferences are held at the same time, they need to  
share the 32 ports. For example, if one user sets up a 10-port  
conference, the other can set up a 22-port conference.  
Technicians can connect two ICB cards to provide up to 62 ports for a  
single conference. In dual mode, there can be only one dual-card  
meeting per pair of cards. The user database and access numbers are  
not shared in a dual-card configuration. There is a separate access  
number required for a dual-card meeting.  
The ICB supports several simultaneous conferences. The number of  
conferences depends on the number of ICB ports available and the  
number of participants (conferees) in each conference. Each ICB card  
supports the following:  
• maximum number of participants as follows:  
— single-card: 32 participants  
— dual-card: 62 participants (unless Chairperson Control over a  
Dual-card Meeting is activated, in which case it is 60  
participants)  
• any number of conferences (up to 10) with one or more participants  
in each conference  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Product description 19  
The ICB communicates with the system software by emulating a digital  
line card (XDLC), which allows existing software to control the  
operation of the ICB. Configure each ICB port as an Automatic Call  
Distribution (ACD) M2616 digital telephone set.  
System overview  
The ICB comes as a single card, or a pair of cards if additional ports are  
required to support a dual-card meeting. Each card stands alone, even  
in the dual-card configuration. For dual-card meetings, the primary card  
uses ports on the secondary card. The following rules apply:  
• Each card (that is, the primary and secondary) has its own set of  
users. There is no “common list” for both cards.  
To schedule a conference, the user logs into the card in which their  
account is defined. If the user has two accounts, one on each card,  
they must try each card separately to find available resources for  
the conference. There is no automatic pooling between cards.  
• A user, super-user, or executive-user can have accounts on many  
cards at a company (that is, a customer can have one person who  
administers multiple bridges for their company).  
• Dual-card conferences can only be scheduled by users on the  
primary card.  
ICB conference feature summary  
The ICB:  
• Allows volume control by conference participants.  
• Offers customized conference-specific greetings.  
• Enables users to acquire and release chairperson control while in a  
conference.  
• Delivers pre-meeting and post-meeting participants notifications.  
• Allows one chairperson per conference.  
• Offers optional chairperson control on the secondary card of a  
dual-card conference.  
• Provides for one or more permanent bridge configurations.  
• Supports multiple conferences simultaneously.  
• Provides chairperson commands during an active conference.  
• Provides conferee commands during an active conference.  
• Allows conference extension beyond the scheduled time.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
20 Product description  
• Issues a 10-minute warning, before the conference termination.  
Also issues a second warning, two minutes before conference  
termination.  
• Supports dial-in and voice prompts for multiple languages including:  
N.A. English, Latin-American Spanish, French, Brazilian  
Portuguese, L.A. Spanish, Japanese, Korean, U.K. English,  
German, Chinese, Dutch, Canadian-French, Swedish, and Italian.  
Refer to the Sales and Marketing Bulletin for the latest supported  
languages.  
• Provides conference password security, requiring the chairperson  
and/or the conferees to enter a Dual-Tone Multifrequency (DTMF)  
password before entering the conference.  
• Automatically starts and terminates conferences based on  
reservations scheduled in advance.  
• Provides Group Call with smart retry.  
• Provides the ability to reserve a port in each conference for the  
chairperson.  
• Provides “Block scheduling” for recurrent conferences, up to one  
year in advance and up to 52 iterations of recurrent conferences.  
• Offers an over-booking option, enabling the administrator to allocate  
up to 125% of port resources (based on the idea that most  
conferences are scheduled with more ports than are required).  
• Provides an emergency bridge option, which creates a permanent  
bridge that automatically dials a pre-determined list of DNs when  
someone dials the emergency bridge DN. The emergency bridge  
does not support the dual-card configuration.  
• Provides automatic conference expansion, allowing additional  
conferees to join the conference. For the expansion to work, the  
ports hosting the additional conferees must be both unassigned and  
available.  
• Provides entry and exit indications – provides four options to  
indicate the entry and exit of a conference participant:  
— entry by name, exit by name  
— entry by name, exit by tone  
— entry by tone, exit by tone  
— silent entry and exit  
• Allows the first conferee joining the conference to turn off and turn  
on conference music.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Product description 21  
• Controls access to the conference in progress by monitoring the  
maximum number of scheduled attendees at each conference.  
• Manages time and date for scheduled conferences and reserves  
ports for each conference.  
• Provides recorded announcements to conferees who attempt to  
enter a meeting too early or after a meeting has ended.  
• Issues audible responses to conferees based on the conference  
activity.  
• Allows recording of a brand line (custom) greeting to replace the  
standard greeting.  
• Provides a scheduling display that indicates meeting reference  
number and whether a custom greeting has been created.  
• Provides scheduling receipts e-mailed to users (receipt includes the  
direct meeting access DN or the single DN access DN).  
• Provides for Microsoft Outlook integration using the calendar to  
schedule meetings.  
• Provides a second warning tone before ending the conference.  
• Allows users to copy a conference.  
• Allows the chairperson control of the conferee volume.  
• Provides current speaker indication.  
• Allows for questions and voting display.  
• Provides for default conference settings.  
• Allows users in the ICB card to access audio conference scheduling  
in Microsoft Outlook.  
• Supports 500 users per card.  
• Provides for up to 52 recurring conferences.  
• Allows the administrator to define a time zone.  
• Offers a toll-free prefix in the e-mail notification.  
• Provides separate user, chairperson, and administrator context  
help.  
• Provides enhancements to the billing report.  
Hardware overview  
Figure 1 on page 22 shows ICB system composition.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
22 Product description  
Figure 1  
ICB system composition  
Users or  
CRT  
(for initial  
setup only)  
administrators  
Web browsers or  
Outlook GUI  
LAN  
Intranet or  
Internet  
ICB  
card(s)  
(inside)  
Users or  
administrators  
Web browsers or  
Outlook GUI  
Communication  
Server 1000  
1.You install one or more Integrated Conference Bridge (ICB) cards in a Media  
Gateway chassis shelf of a CS 1000 or in an IPE shelf of the Meridian 1/SL-100.  
Each ICB card serves a specific set of users.  
2.You connect cards to the corporate Intranet/Internet through a TCP/IP Ethernet  
LAN, which is a 10BaseT or 100BaseT physical connection.  
3.You connect a CRT or Terminal Emulator directly to the serial port of the ICB.  
You require this terminal for initial installation only.You perform all administration  
and maintenance activities remotely.  
4. Users and administrators access the ICB cards from their desktops (which can  
be on the Internet behind a firewall).  
5. Users can schedule a meeting from a Web browser or from the MS Outlook GUI.  
G100564  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Product description 23  
ICB hardware design characteristics  
Each ICB card occupies one slot in a Media Gateway chassis slot (CS  
1000) or an IPE shelf (Meridian 1/CS 1000/CS 2100/SL-100). ICB  
Release 4 is based on a new hardware platform. The ICB card has the  
following hardware interface characteristics:  
• uses the microprocessor unit (MPU) based on the 50MHz MPC  
860P Power Quad Integrated Communications Controller  
• uses standard interface buses and personal computer memory card  
international association (PCMCIA) cards and handles files that are  
compatible with MS-DOS operating system on the PCMCIA storage  
device and formatted with fat 16 file system. The fat 32 file system  
is not supported.  
• uses 4MB flash memory for boot purposes  
• accesses all 32 DS-30X voice/signaling timeslots  
• provides echo cancelling and volume control  
• users 128 KB SRAM memory for saving trap data during resets  
• emulates an M2616 digital telephone set on each ICB port  
• supports Card-LAN interfaces  
• performs X12 signaling protocol messages for input/output  
• uses digital signal processor (DSP) for conferencing and DTMF  
detection  
• provides the drivers for the new hardware through the MPU  
firmware  
• The DSP firmware:  
— Provides DTMF tone detection.  
— Provides for A-law and u-law conversion.  
— Provides the functionality for the conference bridge.  
— Downloads the code from the MPU.  
— Communicates with the MPU.  
— Analyzes the loudness off all received signals continuously and  
selects the two loudest signals to be the active speakers.  
— Handles two-way conversation in conferences with three to 62  
conferees.  
— Normalizes the pulse code modulation (PCM) input samples.  
— Provides gain control on all output samples.  
— Provides software upgrades using a PCMCIA Flash card.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
24 Product description  
• provides self-tests of internal hardware components and allows  
card monitoring and maintenance through the maintenance port;  
provides enable/disable capabilities similar to existing Meridian  
cards  
• provides one RS-232 serial port for administration and maintenance  
access  
• provides enhanced Call Detail Recording (CDR – Meridian 1 only)  
and billing options  
• provides an optional Ethernet interface over a Maintenance  
interface  
• provides a Command Line Interface (CLI) accessible by direct  
connection, modem, telnet, or BUI emulation for performing OA&M  
functions  
• enables the reservation of one port on each card for TUI-only  
interaction  
• provides an embedded web-based server  
• provides a customized ICB BUI login window  
• offers automatic backup. Backup configurations can be e-mailed to  
a predefined e-mail address  
Table 1 describes each hardware component of the ICB application.  
These components connect the ICB to the local or remote maintenance  
terminal.  
Table 1  
ICB hardware list  
Component  
Description  
NT5D51BC or higher An IPE card that provides bridge and conference scheduling for up to 10  
ICB card  
simultaneous conferences.  
NT5D62FA or later  
PCMCIA hard drive  
card  
This PCMCIA card contains the ICB software and configuration. Install the  
PCMCIA card in the lower PCMCIA drive.  
NT5D52 Ethernet  
Adapter card  
Install this adapter card to provide Ethernet connection for the ICB.  
Note 1: NT5D52BC for CS 1000, CS 1000M, Meridian Option 11C, and Meridian  
SL-100.  
Note 2: NT5D52CA is used for Meridian Options 51-81C.  
Note: Caution - You may need the NTCW84JA I/O Panel Filter  
Connector for a large system. See “Installing the NTCW84JA I/O  
information.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Product description 25  
ICB card description  
The ICB card has two PCMCIA sockets. PCMCIA hard drive cards  
store the ICB voice files, application scripts, and MPU and DSP  
firmware. The ICB comes with the PCMCIA hard drive. The bottom  
socket houses the PCMCIA hard drive card that contains the current  
firmware and customer data. Use the top socket to upgrade the  
firmware, and to backup and restore customer data.  
Figure 2 shows the component side of the ICB card and the faceplate.  
The component side shows the DRAM and the PCMCIA socket  
locations. The faceplate shows the card LED and the PCMCIA activity  
light-emitting diode (LED) indicators and the slot locations for PCMCIA  
cards.  
Figure 2  
ICB card  
Dongle  
Connectors to  
backplane  
Lock Latch  
Maintenance LED  
ICB  
Connectors to Mass  
Storage and Application  
Device (PCMCIA)  
PCMCIA Activity LED  
Type II/III PCMCIA Slot  
(for firmware upgrades and  
backing up and restoring data)  
Connector to  
optional DSP DB  
PCMCIA Ejector  
PCMCIA Activity LED  
Type II/III PCMCIA Slot  
(contains configuration and  
application software)  
PCMCIA Ejector  
SDRAM DB  
Lock Latch  
G100565  
The ICB faceplate provides the following:  
Maintenance LED – The ICB faceplate provides a red LED to indicate  
the enabled/disabled status of the card and to indicate the self-testing  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
26 Product description  
result during power up or card insertion into an operating system. This  
LED indicates the following:  
• The LED is lit when the ICB card is disabled.  
• The LED is off when the ICB card is enabled and ready for use.  
• The LED blinks three times, runs software from the PCMCIA, then  
blinks three times again and stays on. The LED remains on until the  
software is enabled when the ICB card successfully completes the  
self-test.  
PCMCIA activity indicator LEDs – These LEDs are next to the  
PCMCIA slots and indicate the following:  
• The LED is lit when the PCMCIA card is disabled.  
• The LED is off when the PCMCIA card is enabled and ready for use.  
• The LED blinks when the PCMCIA card is in use.  
Type II/III PCMCIA slots – The ICB faceplate provides two Type II/III  
PCMCIA card slots. These slots house the PCMCIA cards. Install the  
PCMCIA hard drive card that stores voice files, application scripts, and  
MPU and DSP firmware in the lower slot. Use the upper slot for  
upgrading the firmware, and backing up and restoring customer data.  
External equipment  
VT100 type terminal  
Use a VT100 terminal for initial card configuration. After initial card  
configuration, use the BUI to perform operations, administration and  
maintenance (OA&M). Connect the terminal to the ICB RS-232  
interface using one of the following methods:  
• Direct connections:  
— directly to the IPE module I/O panel  
— directly to the DB-9 connector on the NT5D52 Ethernet Adapter  
card installed on the I/O panel  
• Remote connections:  
— to the IPE module I/O panel through a modem connection  
The terminal interface must be set at 9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit,  
and no parity. The flow control is hard wired (do not use XON/XOFF  
flow control).  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Product description 27  
Ethernet application  
ICB Ethernet use has the following characteristics:  
• The ICB Ethernet connection is separated from the external LAN  
traffic by a firewall.  
• The Ethernet Adapter connection for ICB is NT5D52AA for the IPE  
module application.  
• The Ethernet provider assigns the IP address for the ICB. Enter the  
IP address from the Maintenance terminal.  
To access the ICB CLI over the Ethernet, use a TELNET client on a  
PC workstation or in the LAN.  
ICB operation  
The ICB provides flexibility in configuring conferences. Configure  
conferences as follows:  
• pre-scheduled conferences with a fixed number of ports and  
start/stop times  
• pre-scheduled conferences with a variable numbers of ports, where  
ports are added when required (if available) and subtracted by the  
system automatically as conferees leave the conference  
• permanent bridges with fixed numbers of ports that can be used  
without pre-scheduling the conference  
The minimum duration of a conference is 15 minutes and the maximum  
duration of a time-limited conference is 12 hours. The conference  
starting time and duration can be scheduled in increments of 15  
minutes.  
The ICB card continuously monitors the audio signal level received  
from each conferee and selects the two loudest signals for  
transmission. The two loudest signals are summed and inserted into  
the PCM sample prior to their transmission to other conferees. This  
implementation of the two loudest signals improves the interrupting  
capability of a conference connection and allows normal two-way  
conversation that all conferees can hear.  
In addition to the conferee timeslots, the ICB provides a timeslot  
between the MPU and the DSP. This timeslot transmits message  
prompts, entry and exit tones, or both that the system broadcasts to all  
conferees when requested by the MPU.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
28 Product description  
The ICB uses ACD features to route external incoming trunk and local  
line conferees to their appropriate conferences. The ACD features  
provide queuing, chairperson features, and event reporting for each  
conference.  
The ACD features used by the ICB card provide the following:  
• easy software configuration  
• incoming calls, announcement on arrival, call management, and  
reporting queues  
• operational statistics reports  
• enhanced call routing  
Figure 3 shows the call routing for three conferences and shows the  
conference chairperson access DN for each conference. The figure  
also shows the ACD DN for the ACD queue that controls the path of all  
ports on an ICB card. The right-hand side of the figure shows the  
distribution of ICB ports as ACD agents.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Product description 29  
Figure 3  
Call routing with chairperson access  
Main DNs  
3001  
Trunk calls  
ACD Agent  
ICB Port 0  
DID trunk  
Port 0  
Port 1  
ACD Agent  
ICB Port 1  
3101  
3102  
3103  
ACD Agent  
ICB Port 2  
Port 2  
ACD Agent  
ICB Port 3  
Port 3  
3002  
3003  
ACD DN  
4144  
Local calls  
ACD Agent  
ICB Port 4  
Rls  
H
O
LD  
C
2AB  
EF  
3D  
1
B  
G
H
I
L
5JK  
NO  
6M  
4
P
R
7
8TU  
V
9W  
XY  
S
S
P
0
ACD Agent  
ICB Port 5  
Rls  
H
O
LD  
l
C
2AB  
EF  
3D  
1
B  
G
H
I
L
5JK  
NO  
6M  
4
P
R
7
8TU  
V
9W  
XY  
S
S
P
0
ACD Agent  
ICB Port 31  
R
ls  
H
O
LD  
l
C
E
F
1
2AB  
3D  
G
H
I
L
N
O
B  
4
5JK  
6M  
Intelligent Peripheral  
Equipment  
P
R
S
V
8TU  
X
Y
7
9W  
P
0
S
Chairperson  
DNs  
(IPE) Module  
ACD Queue DN  
for all ports of an  
ICB card  
Note: This figure applies to the direct meeting access option.  
For single-number access, the Main DNs and Chairperson DNs  
(that is, 3001-3103) are replaced by one DN only.  
G100008  
Join the conference using the direct meeting access method  
Assign a main DN and a chairperson DN, for each conference. The  
main DN is the number the conferees dial to get into the conference and  
the chairperson DN is the number the chairperson dials. Configure the  
DNs in the Meridian/CS 1000 system when installing the ICB card. The  
total number of DNs is equal to two times the number of simultaneous  
conferences. For example, 10 simultaneous conferences require 20  
DNs: 10 main DNs and 10 chairperson DNs.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
30 Product description  
When several conferences occur simultaneously in the same ICB card,  
the conferee dials the DN assigned to a specific conference. The ICB  
card identifies the dialed DN and routes the conferee to the appropriate  
conference represented by that specific DN. The system assigns all  
ports on the ICB card to the appropriate conference through the ACD  
DN assigned to that ICB card. The chairperson dials the chairperson  
DN to a specific conference. This number is different from the DN dialed  
by the conferees for the same conference.  
The ICB performs DTMF detection on ICB ports identified as  
chairperson ports. DTMF detects when conferees enter a conference  
password. A conference can start without the chairperson. If all  
allocated ports for a conference are taken up with conferees, the  
chairperson cannot join the conference, unless a port is specifically  
reserved for the chairperson. The chairperson can also join if the  
system allows conference expansion and there are free, un-scheduled  
(floating) ports available.  
The first conferee joining the conference hears an announcement  
indicating that no other conferee has joined the conference, followed by  
60 seconds of music. The system repeats the announcement with 60  
seconds of music, until another conferee joins the conference.  
Join the conference using the single DN access method  
The single DN access method to all meetings provides users with a  
alternative method of accessing the ICB. This feature reduces the  
amount of Direct Inward Dialing (DID) numbers that have to be  
configured in the switch and provides the following benefits:  
• Saves 20 DID numbers from the customer’s DID range.  
• Saves 20 ACD or Phantom DNs in the Meridian system thereby  
providing a cost savings.  
• Simplifies installation as there is no DN pair configuration.  
• Saves work if a change in the numbering plan is required in the  
Meridian system.  
The only trade-off is that callers have an additional step when  
accessing a meeting (that is, after dialing the single-access DN, they  
must enter the chairperson, or meeting, DN of their specific meeting).  
Figure 4 on page 31 shows the DN configuration for single DN access  
with one ICB card.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Product description 31  
Figure 4  
Single DN access method (one ICB card)  
Single-access  
DN for conferences  
dial-in  
Night Call Forward  
ICB  
ICB Card  
ACD  
DN  
TUI services dial-in  
(scheduling,  
Night Call Forward  
recording)  
G100079  
The DNs on the left in Figure 4 can be Phantom DNs or CDNs, instead  
of ACD DNs. The DNs must be DID numbers.  
In a dual-card system, each card requires its own single-access DN. In  
a dual-card set, conferences that span the two cards do not support the  
single DN access method. However, in a dual-card set, simple  
conferences that use only one card support the single DN access  
method.  
Figure 5 on page 32 shows the DN configuration in a Meridian system  
for the single DN access method when the system uses two ICB cards.  
Single DN access requires one DN, instead of the separate 10 DNs  
required with direct meeting access.  
The figure shows a configuration that supports the following:  
• Simple conference contained in the primary ICB – participants dial  
the single-access DN at the top of the figure.  
• Simple conferences contained on the secondary ICB – participants  
dial the single-access DN at the bottom of the figure.  
• Meetings spanning both cards – participants dial the “Dual meeting  
main DN” in the middle of the figure and the chairperson dials the  
“Dual meeting chairperson DN”. The figure shows that dual-card  
meetings do not use the single-access DNs.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
32 Product description  
Figure 5  
Single DN access method (two ICB cards)  
Single-access  
DN for simple  
meetings  
ICB  
ACD  
DN  
Primary  
ICB Card  
TUI services dial-in  
(scheduling,  
recording)  
Dual meeting  
chairperson DN  
Dual meeting main  
DN ACD time overflow  
Hidden from end users  
Voice link  
DN  
Single-access  
DN for simple  
meetings  
Secondary  
ICB Card  
ICB  
ACD  
DN  
TUI services dial-in  
(scheduling,  
recording)  
Dual callers  
transfer DN  
Legend  
ACD DN  
ACD DN , CDN or Phantom DN  
For dual meeting  
G100080  
Note: All DNs on the left side of the figure must be DID numbers.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Product description 33  
Single DN access is mutually exclusive from the direct meeting access  
method in a ICB card or card pair. Configure the card for one access  
method; the system does not support combinations on the card or card  
pair.  
Callers to all meetings access the ICB by dialing one common fixed  
number. The ICB prompts the caller for the meeting or chairperson DN  
to enter the required meeting. In this mode of operation, configure the  
single-access DN in the Meridian system and ICB only. Access DN  
pairs are pre-coded in the card.  
Expand the conference  
Conference expansion allows the system to increase the number of  
conferees if there are remaining ICB ports that are both unassigned  
and unused. Allow or deny conference expansion for each conference  
using the browser user interface (BUI) (see the “Add ports as needed  
When reserving the ICB ports for each simultaneous conference, the  
system does not tag ports for a specific conference. The ICB counts the  
number of reserved ports and compares these against the total number  
of ports provided by the ICB card. The ICB then makes sure that the  
reserved ports do not exceed the total number of ports provided by the  
ICB card.  
If additional (non-scheduled) callers try to join a conference, but there  
are no floating ports, or the system locks out additional conferees, the  
ICB card issues an overflow tone. The system then disconnects the  
call.  
If the system releases un-scheduled (floating) ports from a conference,  
they are immediately available to be used by other conferences that  
have the expansion feature enabled.  
End the conference  
When scheduling a conference, indicate the number of ports, start time,  
and duration of that conference. The conference ends based on the  
start time and conference duration. Ten minutes before the end of a  
conference, the ICB card issues an announcement warning the  
conferees that the conference terminates in 10 minutes. Two minutes  
before the end of a conference, the ICB card issues a second  
announcement warning the conferees that the conference terminates in  
two minutes.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
34 Product description  
When the conference time expires, the ICB card issues the final  
warning to the conferees. The ICB sends a release message to the  
Meridian system for all associated ICB ports. These ports become  
available for the next planned conference. If there is no other scheduled  
conference, they become floating ports which the system does not  
reserve for any conference. Floating ports are available to expand  
conferences in progress.  
Conferees can exit a conference at any time. The ICB detects when a  
conferee exits the conference. If enabled, the ICB announces the  
conferee’s name. When one conferee is on the conference, the system  
issues an announcement that only one conferee is present, followed by  
60 seconds of music. The system repeats this announcement and the  
music, until at least one more conferee joins in, or the ICB terminates  
the conference at the scheduled end time, or if the conferee or  
chairperson issues the stop music command (*19).  
Note: A conference can begin and end two minutes before the  
defined time. This feature allows the system to close all terminating  
conferences two minutes earlier and start all scheduled conferences  
immediately after closing the terminating conferences. This feature is  
important when terminating and starting conferences use some of  
the same DNs.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
35  
Engineering guidelines  
Purpose  
This chapter provides guidelines for engineering ICB Release 4.  
Engineering guidelines can vary depending on the system platform.  
The chapter includes the following sections:  
“System requirements” on page 35 – outlines the software and  
hardware requirements for the Meridian 1, CS 1000, and CS  
2100/Meridian SL-100.  
“System capacity” on page 37 – outlines the system capacity  
requirements for the Meridian 1, CS 1000, and CS 2100/Meridian  
SL-100.  
“System compatibility” on page 37 – lists the various compatible  
systems.  
describes the ACD DN resource requirements.  
“LAN configuration” on page 40 – provides guidelines for  
configuring the LAN options.  
System requirements  
Software  
The required system software is as follows:  
Meridian 1 – X11 Release 17 supports ICB Release 4 with up to 16  
ports per card; X11 Release 22 and later supports ICB Release 4  
with up to 32 ports per card.  
CS 1000 – Release 1 and above supports ICB Release 4 with up to  
32 ports per card.  
Meridian SL-100 – MSL09 and later supports ICB Release 4 with  
up to 32 ports per card using the feature Flexible Voice/Data TN.  
The system software must contain the basic and advanced automatic  
call distribution (ACD) features and routing software.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
36 Engineering guidelines  
Meridian 1 and CS 1000 software packages  
In addition to standard basic software, the following software packages  
are required:  
• ACD basic package (45)  
• ACD advanced features (41)  
• Digital set (88)  
• End-to-end signaling (10) – required if chairperson calls locally  
within the same switch  
• Phantom TN (254), optional, but required if Phantom TN is used  
• Network ACD Enhanced Overflow (178), optional, but required for  
the dual-card configuration  
• The following packages are optional, but are required for billing:  
— Call Detail Recording (CDR) package 4  
— CDR with Charge Account (CHG) package 23  
— Charge Account/Authorization Code Base (CAB) package 24  
Meridian SL-100 software packages  
In addition to the standard Meridian SL-100 software, the following  
software packages are required:  
• ACD Basic, ACD Routing Enhancement  
• MSL Digital Phones M2000-Display  
• MSL Flex LEN on IPE  
• MSL Enhanced Peripheral Equipment (IPE)  
Hardware  
Table 2 describes the ICB hardware specifications.  
Table 2  
Hardware specifications  
Item  
Descriptions  
Port capacity  
12-32 ports on a single card.  
Up to 62 ports in a dual-card configuration, unless chairperson control is  
required on the second card, in which case the capacity is 60 ports.  
Capacity upgrades  
Upgradeable from 12 to 62 ports.  
Maximumnumberof Up to 10 simultaneous conferences with a total of 32 conferee ports per card.  
conferences  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Engineering guidelines 37  
Table 2  
Hardware specifications (Continued)  
Item  
Descriptions  
Maximumnumberof Up to 20 simultaneous user sessions on the BUI. Same is true in dual-card  
BUI sessions configuration. There can be up to 500 users per card.  
Maximumnumberof Only one user can be active in a TUI session. While one TUI user is active,  
TUI sessions  
other users will wait in the ACD queue.  
PCMCIA card  
System interface  
PCMCIA Type II or III.  
DS-30X, CE-MUX, Card LAN, Ethernet Adapter.  
Optivity, VT-100 terminal or PC with VT100 emulation.  
Maintenance  
terminal  
Power requirements Power is supplied by the power supply of the shelf/module where the ICB card  
is installed. Each ICB card requires a total maximum power of 3.5 watts.  
Real time impact  
Comparable to that of a digital line card (DLC).  
System capacity  
Physical Capacity  
Each ICB card occupies one slot on the Gateway/IPE chassis shelf.  
The total number of ICB cards per system is limited by these factors:  
• For Meridian 1 or CS 1000M: The number of IPE shelves multiplied  
by eight. Option 11C and Wall-Mount systems are limited to six  
cards.  
• For CS 1000: The number of Gateway chassis shelves multiplied by  
four cards.  
• For CS 2100/Meridian SL-100: Up to eight cards can be supported  
per IPE shelf.  
System compatibility  
Meridian 1 and Option 11  
ICB Release 4 is compatible with the following Meridian 1/Option 11  
systems:  
• Option 11C, 11E, 11C Mini  
• Option 21 and 21E  
• Option 51, 51C  
• Option 61, 61C  
• Option 71  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
38 Engineering guidelines  
• Option 81, 81C  
• SL-1 systems with IPE upgrade (NT and XT)  
CS 1000  
ICB Release 4 is compatible with all CS 1000 systems.  
CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 system compatibility  
ICB Release 4 is compatible with all CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 system  
configurations.  
Automatic call distribution resource allocation  
The ACD function routes incoming calls to the ICB, where each ICB  
port operates as an ACD agent. All ICB ports are part of the same ACD  
queue and operate as a pool of ports with equal status. The system  
identifies the ACD queue with an ACD DN that handles the connection  
of conferees (ACD agents) to the appropriate conference.  
ACD resources must be reviewed in the Incremental Software  
Management (ISM) of the customer configuration, if applicable. Each  
ICB port represents an ACD agent that uses a Terminal Number  
(TN)/Line Equipment Number (LEN) from the system resources.  
The configuration DN and the corresponding TNs on the CS 1000, or  
LENs on the CS 2100/Meridian SL-100, are system resources. The  
system resources allocated to the ICB must be subtracted from the  
overall system resources and cannot be used for any other application,  
as long as they are assigned for ICB use.  
Note: If a customer uses Agent ID and the direct meeting access  
method, the agent IDs must be consecutive (for example, 00-31).  
Each ICB card, using the direct meeting access method, requires the  
following:  
• One ACD group for each ICB card.  
• Assign ACD agent TNs/LENs and corresponding M2616 digital  
sets. Each configured ICB port appears as an M2616 digital set of  
an ACD agent. The number of TNs/LENs is equal to the maximum  
number of ports provided by the ICB card. For an ICB with 32 ports  
active, the configuration requires 32 TNs/LENs. TNs/LENs require  
32 DNs for the ACD incalls key and 32 DNs for the secondary  
directory number (SDN) key (Key 2).  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Engineering guidelines 39  
• An ICB card configured to the maximum capacity of 32 ports and 10  
simultaneous conferences requires 87 ACD DNs and 32 TNs/LENs  
as follows:  
— one ACD DN assigned to the ICB card  
— 32 TNs/LENs assigned to the 32 ports (1 PDN and 1 SDN for  
each TN/LEN; these can be internal DNs – non-DID)  
— 20 ACD DID DNs (10 DN pairs) for dialing into the potential  
conferences  
Note: For single-number access, replace this with 1 DN.  
— 1 DN for TUI access  
Full 62-port dual-card conferencing, using the direct meeting access  
method, requires the following:  
Two ICB cards and six ACD groups as follows:  
— 64 ACD agents (32 for each card), non-DID  
— 64 secondary DNs for these agents, non-DID  
— 36 DNs for simple conferences (9 pairs in each card)  
Note: For single-number access, replace this with 2 DNs (1  
for each card).  
— 1 DN for dual-card conference access  
— 1 DN for dual-card chairperson access  
— 1 DN for the link DN, non-DID  
— 1 DN for the transfer DN, non-DID  
— 2 DNs for TUI access (1 for each card)  
This provides a total of 170 DNs, 40 of which are DID.  
Assign an Ethernet port to each ICB card with an IP address, subnet  
mask, and gateway during installation.  
Note: On the CS 2100/Meridian SL-100, verify that there are  
enough DS30A links back to the extended peripheral module (XPM)  
to handle the traffic.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
40 Engineering guidelines  
LAN configuration  
ICB customers should select one of the following alternatives for BUI  
access:  
• users and administrators access the ICB from the global internet  
(the new capability of MICB Release 3)  
• users and administrators access the ICB from the customer  
LAN/intranet only (existing MICB Release 2 capability)  
Global internet access  
Global internet access requires careful configuration of security  
elements. Figure 6 shows a sample configuration.  
Figure 6  
Global internet access example  
World Wide  
Web  
Firewall  
ICB BUI  
Green and  
Red LAN  
ICB4  
connection  
ICB BUI  
ICB BUI  
E-LAN  
10/100 Base-T  
C-LAN  
10/100 Base-T or 100 Base-T  
Router  
ICB 4  
card (s)  
PBX E-LAN  
connection  
ICB BUI  
IPE Module  
ICB BUI  
G100277  
In typical configurations, the firewall does not allow any kind of access  
from the World Wide Web into the C-LAN. Only access from the C-LAN  
hosts to the World Wide Web is allowed (for example, HTTP and FTP).  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Engineering guidelines 41  
Hosts that need to be accessed from the World Wide Web must be  
placed in a special sub-network called the Green and Red LAN. The  
firewall isolates the Green and Red LAN from the C-LAN. Devices that  
can be accessed from the World Wide Web are put into this segregated  
LAN segment. Nortel Networks recommends that the Green and Red  
LAN be the location of the ICB connection.  
On the other hand, C-LAN hosts require open access to the ICB for  
administration and maintenance.  
Table 3 summarizes the recommended access permissions allowed by  
the firewall. All other paths not in the table should be denied.  
Table 3  
Firewall access permissions  
Source  
WWW  
C-LAN  
ICB  
Destination  
ICB  
Protocol  
HTTP  
ICB  
HTTP, FTP, TELNET  
WWW  
FTP (optional; allows upgrade from the  
web)  
ICB  
ICB  
C-LAN  
FTP  
Mail Server  
SMTP  
Notes  
Take the following notes into consideration:  
Technically, a firewall can be configured to enforce these access  
restrictions even when the ICB is in the C-LAN. However, a Green  
and Red LAN is usually used, because it is safer.  
• Cards of a dual-ICB set must be in the same LAN segment, with no  
restrictions between them.  
LAN/intranet access only  
In this configuration, the ICB is not accessible from anywhere in the  
World Wide Web (assuming this policy is enforced by the firewall).  
There are two options for this type of configuration: C-LAN connection  
and E-LAN connection.  
Figure 7 on page 42 shows an example of the C-LAN connection.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
42 Engineering guidelines  
Figure 7  
LAN/intranet access only – C-LAN connection  
World Wide  
Web  
Firewall  
ICB BUI  
C-LAN and ICB  
BUI traffic  
ICB BUI  
ICB BUI  
ICB LAN  
connection  
C-LAN  
10/100 Base-T or 100 Base-T  
ICB 4  
card (s)  
ICB BUI  
IPE Module  
PBX E-LAN  
connection  
Router  
E-LAN  
10/100 Base-T  
ICB BUI  
1. The ICB is open to Customer LAN (C-LAN) traffic, including services such as Telnet  
and FTP.  
2. There is no web traffic on the Embedded LAN (E-LAN).  
G100278  
Figure 8 on page 43 shows an example of the E-LAN connection.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Engineering guidelines 43  
Figure 8  
LAN/intranet access only – E-LAN connection  
World Wide  
Web  
Firewall  
ICB BUI  
ICB BUI  
ICB BUI  
traffic only  
ICB BUI  
ICB LAN  
connection  
E-LAN  
10/100 Base-T  
C-LAN  
10/100 Base-T or 100 Base-T  
Router  
ICB 4  
card (s)  
PBX E-LAN  
connection  
ICB BUI  
IPE Module  
ICB BUI  
1. The ICB is not open to Customer LAN (C-LAN) traffic and you can block traffic through the router  
(for example, Telnet and FTP).  
2. The ICB BUI traffic is on the Embedded LAN (E-LAN).  
3. If there is no router between the C-LAN ad the E-LAN, there is no BUI access from the C-LAN.  
G100279  
Notes  
The following notes apply to LAN/intranet access only:  
• The ICB does not interact with the Meridian system through the  
E-LAN, so logically there is no requirement to put it there. In  
addition, if the E-LAN is completely separated from the C-LAN, the  
ICB cannot be in the E-LAN.  
• Nortel Networks recommends that customer try not to put any BUI  
traffic on the E-LAN if possible.  
• Each site should select the most convenient option, taking into  
account the physical LAN endpoints available near the ICB card.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
44 Engineering guidelines  
• When there are multiple ICBs (that is, more than three) and the BUI  
is used frequently, the BUI traffic can load the E-LAN, so it may be  
better to connect the cards to the C-LAN.  
• The ICB has a broadcast-storm protection mechanism: it shuts off  
the LAN port (temporarily) when traffic is too heavy. Nortel Networks  
recommends that the ICB be put in a “quiet” LAN segment to get a  
better response time.  
Summary of LAN installation information  
Use the following steps when installing and configuring the LAN:  
1 Determine whether the ICB is to be accessed from the World Wide  
Web.  
2 If yes, coordinate the firewall configuration with your IS group  
according to Table 3 on page 41.  
3 Determine what is the physical connection point of the ICB. Note  
these requirements: 10Base-T or 100Base-T, full-duplex.  
4 Get the following ICB IP parameters from your IS group: IP address,  
gateway address, and subnet mask.  
5 Get the Mail Server IP address from your IS group. Confirm that the  
ICB is allowed to access this server by SMTP.  
Testing:  
Use the following steps to test the LAN configuration:  
1 After the ICB is installed and the IP parameters are configured, try  
to “ping” from any host in the C-LAN to the ICB or from the ICB to a  
host on the C-LAN.  
2 In the case of World Wide Web access, try accessing the ICB from  
a browser (HTTP access).  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
45  
Installation and configuration  
Purpose  
This chapter describes how to prepare the system for installation, install  
the ICB into:  
• the IPE module for Meridian 1  
• the Option 11 shelf  
• the Media Gateway for CS 1000  
• the IPE module for CS 2100/Meridian SL-100  
This chapter also describes how to connect the ICB to the  
administration terminal, and configure the card.  
The chapter contains the following sections:  
“Getting started” on page 45 – describes the steps to use when  
preparing for an installation.  
“CS 1000 configuration” on page 47 – shows how to configure  
the Meridian 1 and CS 1000.  
how to configure the Meridian SL-100.  
shows how to install the card and set up the web server.  
“ICB Installation Wizard” on page 72 – describes how to use the  
BUI’s Installation Wizard to complete configuration.  
Getting started  
To begin the installation, unpack and inspect the components, take  
inventory, and determine which IPE card slot(s) in which to install the  
ICB card(s). See Table 1 on page 24 for a complete listing of the ICB  
hardware.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
46 Installation and configuration  
Unpack and inspect the equipment  
Unpack and inspect the equipment for damage. Follow the steps in  
Procedure 1, before performing the installation and configuration  
procedures in this chapter.  
Procedure 1  
Prepare for the installation  
1
2
3
4
Remove items from the installation site that can generate static charge.  
Use antistatic spray if the site is carpeted.  
Ground yourself before handling any equipment.  
Remove equipment carefully from its packaging. Save the packaging, in case  
the card has to be returned.  
5
Inspect the equipment for faults or damage. Report any damaged component  
to your Nortel Networks representative and the company who delivered the  
equipment.  
This procedure is now complete  
Take inventory  
After unpacking and inspecting the equipment, verify that all necessary  
components are on site before beginning the installation. Check the  
equipment received against the shipping documents. Report any  
missing parts to your Nortel Networks representative.  
Verify IPE Slot(s)  
The ICB card can be installed in any IPE card slot associated with full  
50-pin I/O cables. Table 4 lists the Meridian system modules and the  
card slots appropriate for ICB installation.  
Table 4  
ICB installation into card slots  
Meridian system modules  
ICB card slots  
NT8D37BA/EC IPE modules, and  
NT8D11BC/ED CE/PE modules.  
All available IPE card slots.  
NT8D37AA/DC IPE modules.  
CS 1000.  
IPE card slots 0, 4, 8, and 12.  
1, 2, or 3 of the Media Gateway, or slots  
7, 8, 9, or 10 of the Media Gateway  
Expansion.  
Determine the access method  
Select the access method, single-number or direct meeting access, the  
system will be using. With direct access, configure 10 DN pairs. In  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Installation and configuration 47  
single-number access mode, configure only the single-access DN. In  
both cases, the BUI provides instructions about what to do next.  
Installing the NTCW84JA I/O Panel Filter Connector for a Large System  
For Large Systems, the standard IPE module I/O filtering is provided by  
the 50-pin filter connectors mounted in the I//O panel on the back of the  
IPE shelf. The filter connector attaches externally to the MDF cables  
and internally to the NT8D81AA backplane to the I/O panel ribbon cable  
assembly. For 100BaseTX TLAN operation, the standard I/O filter  
connector must be replaced with the NTCW84JA ITG Line-specific I/O  
filter connector for the slot occupied by the ICB card.  
Note: The NTCW84JA ITG-filter connector is not required on Small  
Systems or Succession 1000 systems.  
CAUTION: For Large systems manufactured between 1998-1999 and  
shipped in North America, IPE modules have the NT8D81BA  
backplane to I/O panel ribbon cable assembly with a non-removable  
filter connector. The NT8D81BA is compatible with a 10BaseT TLAN. If  
a 100BaseT TLAN is required, order the NT8D81AA Backplane to I/O  
panel ribbon cable assembly to replace it. Do not install the NTCW84JA  
filter connector onto the existing non-removable filter connector.  
CS 1000 configuration  
Prior to installing any of the ICB hardware, configure the system  
software for the ICB card(s) through the system TTY terminal.  
Summary  
The following summarizes the tasks for configuring the CS 1000:  
1 LD 23 – Define the ACD DN assigned to the ICB card.  
2 Define DNs using either:  
LD 23 – Define ACD DNs and assign them to the ICB card.  
or  
LD 10 – Define Phantom TNs and forward them to the ACD DN  
assigned to the ICB card.  
3 LD 11 – Configure ICB ports as digital sets.  
4 LD 23 – Configure the main DN for dual-card conferences.  
5 LD 15 – Configure the CDR data if the feature Charge Account is  
used for billing.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
48 Installation and configuration  
Assign ACD DNs  
The first step is to assign ACD queue.  
Table 5  
LD 23 – Define the ACD queue assigned to the ICB card  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
NEW  
ACD  
xx  
Description  
Add new data.  
TYPE  
CUST  
ACDN  
MAXP  
HOML  
ACD data block.  
Customer number.  
xxxx  
32  
ACD DN assigned to the ICB card.  
Maximum number of ACD agent positions.  
Logout on handset removal.  
NO  
Table 6  
LD 23 – Assign the ACD DNs for the ICB card  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
NEW  
ACD  
xx  
Description  
New control data block.  
ACD data block.  
TYPE  
CUST  
ACDN  
MAXP  
NCFW  
Customer number.  
xxxx  
1
Conferee (main) or chairperson DN.  
Maximum number of ACD agent positions.  
ACD DN assigned to ICB card.  
xxxx  
Note: Repeat commands in this table for each ACD DN being configured.  
Note: The number of DNs defined for each ICB card using direct  
meeting access depends on the number of conferences and bridges  
specified on the card. A maximum of 10 conferences can be  
configured requiring 20 DNs, two for each conference. One DN is for  
the conferees to call in (the main DN) and one DN is for the  
conference chairperson.  
Define Phantom TN blocks  
Phantom TNs can be used, instead of ACD DNs, to serve as  
chairperson DNs, conferees DNs and TUI DNs.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Installation and configuration 49  
Enter the CS 1000 definitions for the Phantom TN in LD 10 as follows:  
1 The specific TN and DN vary by site.  
Those variables are represented by “x” in Figure 9 on page 49.  
2 CFXA is the Class of Service (CLS) that enables Call Forwarding.  
3 The last four variables in the screen (under FTR) are the main ACD  
DNs in LD 23.  
Figure 9  
Phantom TN definitions (LD 10)  
DES MICB  
TN  
xxx  
x
xx  
xx  
PHANTOM  
TYPE 500  
CDEN 4D  
CUST 0  
WRLS NO  
DN  
xxxx  
x
MARP  
AST NO  
IAPG 0  
HUNT  
TGAR 1  
LDN NO  
NCOS 0  
SGRP 0  
RNPG 0  
XLST  
SCI 0  
SCPW  
SFLT NO  
CAC 3  
CLS  
CTD  
XRD  
DTN  
CWD  
MRD  
FBD  
SWD  
C6D CNID  
XFD  
MWD  
WTA THFD FND  
HTD ONS  
LPR  
CFTD SFD  
LPD XHD  
CCSD LND TVD  
CLBD AUTU  
ICDD CDMD LLCN EHTD MCTD  
GPUD DPUD CFXA ARND OVDD AGTD CLTD LDTD ASCD  
MBXD CPFA CPTA HSPD UDI  
NRWD NRCD NROD SPKD CRD  
ACC HBTD DDGA NAMA MIND  
PRSD MCRD  
EXRO SHL  
CWND USRD BNRD OCHD RTDD FAXD  
PLEV 02  
ABDD CFHD DNAA  
AACS NO  
MLWU_LANG 0  
FTR DCFW 12  
<ACD DN>  
The next step is to configure ICB ports as digital sets.  
Table 7  
LD 11 – Configure ICB ports as digital sets  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
NEW  
Description  
Add new data.  
TYPE  
2616  
Digital telephone set M2616.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
50 Installation and configuration  
Table 7  
LD 11 – Configure ICB ports as digital sets (Continued)  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
TN  
l s c u  
s c u  
Terminal number of the ICB card, Options 51C, 61C, and 81C.  
For Option 11C and CS 1000.  
CUST  
CLS  
xx  
Customer number.  
FLXA  
VCE,  
WTA  
FLXA = Flexible Voice/Data Allowed.  
VCE = Voice.  
WTA = Warning Tone Allowed.  
ACD agent (Use FLXA).  
KEY  
0 ACD  
ACD DN plus CLI plus position ID.  
<ACD DN>  
<CLI>  
<pos ID>  
KEY  
KEY  
KEY  
KEY  
KEY  
1 SCR <any DN>  
2 NRD  
Line key.  
Not ready key.  
3 MSB  
Make set busy key.  
4 TRN  
Call transfer key.  
9 CHG  
Change key. Use with CDR and billing feature.  
Note: The administrator should consider chairperson dial-out restrictions through the ICB ports to prevent international  
dial-out.  
The number of virtual ACD agents of the ACD queue is equal to the  
number of ICB ports. For example, if 12 ports are enabled, define 12  
ACD agents. If the TN for the ICB card is specified as 28 0 6, then TNs  
for the 12 agents are specified as 28 0 6 0 through 28 0 6 11.  
Note: Agent IDs must be consecutive (for example, 2000-2031).  
Figure 10 on page 51 shows a sample LD 20 printout of a built ICB port.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation and configuration 51  
Figure 10  
LD 20 ICB configuration  
CHG  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
52 Installation and configuration  
Configure DNs for a dual-card conference  
When a dual-card conference is defined, two meetings are defined on  
two cards. First, the meeting is booked on the primary card allocating  
the maximum free ports. Second, the meeting is booked on the  
secondary card allocating the rest of free ports for the dual-card  
conference. The user defines a dual-card conference only on the  
primary card.  
When a user dials into a dual-card conference, the call can terminate  
either on the primary or on the secondary card. Calls to the dual-card  
conference main ACD DN are forwarded according to the ACD time  
overflow night table.  
On both cards (primary and secondary), the user cannot use the  
dual-card conference pair DNs for a simple meeting. Therefore, nine  
DNs are available for simple meeting and bridges.  
For a dual-card configuration, one card functions as the primary card  
and the other as the secondary card. Define for each card an ACD data  
block with an ACD DN in LD 23, as shown in Table 5 on page 48.  
For the primary card, configure the following DNs:  
• DN pairs (up to nine) – These pairs serve as chairperson and  
conferee DNs for single-card conferences (less than 32 ports) on  
the primary card.  
Note: If single-number access is being used, DN pairs are not  
required. Instead, define the single-number access DN in this  
step which callers use to access a simple conference on the  
primary card.  
• TUI DN – This is the DN that users dial to set up single-card  
conferences on the primary card. Do not configure this DN, if the  
TUI is not going to be used.  
• Chairperson DN – This is the DN that chairperson of a dual-card  
conference dials to enter a dual-card conference. This DN is  
required for dual-card setup.  
Therefore, for the primary card, configure up to 20 DNs in LD 23 that  
Night Call Forward (NCFW) to the ACD DN of the primary card.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation and configuration 53  
For the secondary card, configure the following DNs:  
• DN pairs (up to nine) – These pairs serve as chairperson and  
conferee DNs for single-card conferences (less than 32 ports) on  
the secondary card.  
Note: If single-number access is being used, DN pairs are not  
required. Instead, define the single-number access DN in this  
step which callers use to access a simple conference on the  
secondary card.  
• TUI DN – This is the DN that users dial to set up single-card  
conferences on the secondary card. Do not configure this DN, if the  
the TUI is not going to be used.  
Transfer DN – This is the DN that transfers dual-card conference  
participants from the primary card to the secondary card when the  
primary card reaches capacity. The primary card fills up first in a  
dual-card conference. Configure this DN for dual-card setup.  
• Link DN – This is the DN the creates a speech path between the  
primary card and the secondary card for dual-card conferences.  
Configure this DN for dual-card setup.  
Therefore, for the secondary card, configure up to 22 DNs in LD 23 that  
Night Call Forward (NCFW) to the ACD DN of the secondary card.  
The main DN must also be configured for the dual-card conference. The  
main DN is the DN that conferees dial to enter the dual-card  
conference. When the conferees dial the main DN, the main DN  
forwards them to the ACD queue of the primary card. When the primary  
card becomes full, the transfer DN transfers further conferees to the  
secondary card. Use Table 8 to configure the main DN for dual-card  
conferences.  
Table 8  
LD 23 – Configure the main DN for dual-card conferences  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
NEW  
ACD  
xx  
Description  
Add new data.  
TYPE  
CUST  
ACDN  
MAXP  
ACD data block.  
Customer number.  
xxxx  
1
The main DN for dual-card conferences.  
Maximum number of ACD agent positions.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
54 Installation and configuration  
Table 8  
LD 23 – Configure the main DN for dual-card conferences (Continued)  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
Note: Carriage return to the end and start again.  
REQ  
NEW  
NACD  
xx  
New control data block.  
TYPE  
CUST  
ACDN  
TABL  
Network ACD data block.  
Customer number.  
xxxx  
N
The main DN for dual-card conferences.  
Night time overflow table.  
- TRGT  
xxxx 0  
xxxx is the ACD DN of the primary card.  
0 is the time, in seconds, for an immediate transfer to the  
primary card.  
- TRGT  
yyyy 2  
yyyy is the ACD DN of the secondary card.  
2 is the time, in seconds, for a delayed transfer to the secondary  
card.  
Table 9 shows a sample dialing plan for a 62-port dual-card  
configuration.  
Table 9  
Sample dialing plan for a 62-port dual-card configuration  
DNs for the  
DNs for the  
Description of DNs  
primary card  
secondary card  
Configure in...  
LD 23  
ACD DN  
7000  
8000  
Pair DNs for single-  
card conferences  
7001-7018  
(NCFW = 7000 in  
LD 23)  
8001-8018  
(NCFW = 8000 in  
LD 23)  
LD 23  
TUI DNs  
7019 (NCFW = 7000)  
8019 (NCFW = 8000)  
LD 23  
LD 23  
LD 23  
LD 23  
Chairperson DNs  
Transfer DN  
Link DN  
7020 (NCFW = 7000)  
N/A  
N/A  
8021 (NCFW = 8000)  
8022 (NCFW = 8000)  
Main DN  
7021 (TRGT = 7000 0) 7021 (TRGT = 8000 2) LD 23  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation and configuration 55  
Note: Because of the number and variety of DNs programmed for  
the dual-card setup, Nortel Networks recommends creating a dialing  
plan chart similar to Table 9 on page 54. Refer to this chart when  
configuring the primary and secondary card attributes, including the  
dual-card settings, in the administration BUI.  
Finally, configure each port on the primary and secondary cards as a  
digital set. See Table 7 on page 49.  
Assign CDR data  
If charge account is used for CDR billing, then configure the feature  
Charge Account for CDR billing. Remember to define Key 9 on all ICB  
key ports. See Table 10.  
Table 10  
LD 15 – Define the charge account for CDR data  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change customer data.  
CDR data block.  
TYPE  
CHLN  
CDR_DATA  
23  
Set the charge account number length to 23.  
CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 configuration  
Single-card configuration  
After installing the ICB card(s) and connecting the terminal for CLI  
access and the server for BUI access, perform CS 2100/Meridian  
SL-100 database configuration. Figure 11 on page 56 shows the tables  
to datafill for single-card setup.  
Note: If single-number access is being used, the DN pairs are not  
required. Instead configure a single-number access DN.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
56 Installation and configuration  
Figure 11  
Single-card conference, 10 conferences, 32 ports  
Table DNROUTE  
ICB  
997-1400  
Table OFRT  
601 997-1400  
32 ACD  
agents  
ICB Card  
assigned to  
ICB  
ACDGRP  
Table DNROUTE  
ICB  
997-1400 (Main ACD DN to route to ACD agents)  
997-1601 to 997-1610 (setup for up to 10 ICB conferences)  
997-1701 to 997-1910 (setup for up to 10 ICB chairpersons)  
997-1800 (setup for single access ICB conference call)  
997-1900 (setup for single access ICB conference call)  
G100016  
Configuration procedure  
Single-card installation enables up to 10 conferences on one 32-port  
ICB card. Each ICB card can use one ICB ACD Group to handle all the  
access DNs required.  
To configure an ICB single-card conference with direct meeting access,  
from a maintenance and administration position (MAP) terminal follow  
the steps in Procedure 2.  
Procedure 2  
Configure a single-card conference  
1
2
Define LENs as FLXA (MSL09 or above) in table LNINV for a 32-port  
conference. Refer to Figure 12 on page 57.  
Define the ICB ACDGRP and ACD agents assigned to the ICB card. See  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installation and configuration 57  
3
Define the ICB conference and chairperson bridge DNs. Refer to Figure 16  
on page 58. This step provides the following:  
a
Main DN for conference ACD groups to access the ICB agents on the  
card.  
b
c
d
Conference DNs and Chairperson DNs.  
TUI DN and Assistant DN.  
Single number access conference and chairperson DN.  
4
5
Define the night service route from ACDGRP NSROUTE.  
The night service DN assigned in table OFRT allows conference and  
chairperson ACDGRPs to route to the ICB card ACD agents. Table  
DNROUTE defines the routes. Figure 17 on page 58 shows an example of  
table OFRT routing to 214 997 1400 (ICB DN) assigned in table DNROUTE.  
Use the following tables and command interfaces (CIs) to datafill the ICB for  
single-card configuration:  
Table LNINV.  
Table ACDGRP.  
Table ACDSGRP.  
Table ACDLOGIN.  
Table CUSTACD (optional).  
Table ACDENLOG (optional).  
Table DNROUTE.  
Table OFRT.  
Table OFCENG.  
Service Orders.  
Figure 12  
LNINV example  
LEN CARDCODE PADGRP STATUS GND BNV MNO CARDINFO  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
IPE1 00 0 00 00 5D51AB NPDGP WORKING N NL Y FLXA  
Note: Cardcode can also be configured as an 8D02 digital line card.  
Figure 13  
ACDGRP example  
ACDNAME CUSTGRP ACDRNGTH THROUTE NSROUTE PRIOPRO DBG  
MAXCQSIZ MAXWAIT ACDMIS MSQS DISTRING OBSWTONE FRCNGTSV  
OPTIONS  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------  
MICB BNRRCH 12 OFRT 600 OFRT 600 0 Y 2 0 N N NONE N N (ACDDISP 4)  
(NONIMCUT ) $  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
58 Installation and configuration  
Figure 14  
ACDSGRP example  
ACDGROUP SUBGROUP RECORDER  
--------------------------------------------------------  
1 NONE  
MICB  
Figure 15  
ACDLOGIN example  
LOGINID CUSTGRP  
1234  
OPTIONS  
$
PSWD  
N
N
BNRRCH  
6
The ACD login ID must match the ICB physical port connection to the CS  
2100/Meridian SL-100. The ACD agents login must be in descending order,  
otherwise the ICB card cannot login the agents. After adding the ACD login  
IDs, enter the first agent’s ID in the ICB BUI (see “Step 1 – Basic Card  
Note: If using Enhanced ACD Login to login specific ACD agent IDs, datafill tables  
CUSTACD and ACDENLOG to make sure ICB ACD agents can log in.  
Figure 16  
DNROUTE example  
AREACODE OFCCODE STNCODE DNRESULT  
------------------------------------------------------------------  
214 997 1601 FEAT ACD MICB PRIM 0 0  
214 997 1602 FEAT ACD MICB SUPP 0  
214 997 1603 FEAT ACD MICB SUPP 0 (Also used for TUI and Assistant DN)  
.......cont until # of ports needed are configured  
214 997 1701 FEAT ACD MICB SUPP 0 0  
214 997 1702 FEAT ACD MICB SUPP 0  
214 997 1703 FEAT ACD MICB SUPP 0  
.......cont until # of ports needed are configured  
Note: The DNs in bold are only required when using single access DNs.  
Figure 17  
OFRT example  
RTE RTELIST  
---------------------  
600 (RT 214 NP LCL 9971400 Y N $) $  
Note: Use this table to forward, through night service, the ACD main conference  
and chairperson conference to the ICB ACD prime DN. This example uses 997  
1400 as the ACD Prime DN.  
7
Define each ICB port as an M2616 digital telephone set. Define ICB ports as  
ACD agents in SERVORD. Define the digital set keys as follows:  
Key 1: ACD  
Key 1: M0200  
Key 1: COMMUNICTR  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Installation and configuration 59  
Key 2: Secondary DN  
Key 3: Not Ready (NRD)  
Key 4: ACD Not Ready (ACDNR)  
Key 5: Fast Transfer (FXR)  
The following example shows how to datafill the ACD agents using  
SERVORD. The configuration requires up to 32 LENs and 64 DNs. ACD  
Incalls and Key 2 use a secondary DN.  
Figure 18  
QLEN example  
LEN: IPE1 00 0 00 00  
TYPE: SINGLE PARTY LINE  
SNPA: 214  
DIRECTORY NUMBER: 9971401  
(NON-UNIQUE)  
LINE CLASS CODE: M2616 WITH DISPLAY AND HANDSFREE  
CUSTGRP: BNRRCH SUBGRP: 0 NCOS: 0 RING: Y  
ACDKEY: INCALLS MICB1  
CARDCODE: 5D51AB GND: N PADGRP: NPDGP BNV: NL MNO:Y  
PM NODE NUMBER 50  
1
N
:
PM TERMINAL NUMBER :  
DNGRPS OPTIONS:  
OPTIONS:  
1
COMMUNICTR  
MSB  
ACDNR  
KEY  
---  
1
DN  
--  
ACD  
DN  
9971401 INCALLS MICBPRIM1  
9971501  
1
N
2
KEY FEATURE  
--- -------  
3 ACDNR  
4 MSB $  
5 FXR  
16 HANDSFREE  
Note: When adding the display feature to the M2616 set, use OPTKEY1,  
Option M0200.  
Define Agent IDs as consecutive numbers within the lower and upper limit  
8
In table OFCENG, set configure ALL_ACD_LOGIN_IDS_VALID Y.  
Figure 19  
OFCENG example  
PARMNAME  
PARMVAL  
N
Y
ALLOW_RINGING_ON_TIP_SIDE  
ALL_ACD_LOGIN_IDS_VALID  
This procedure is now complete  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
60 Installation and configuration  
Dual-card configuration  
The dual-card configuration enables a single conference to occur on  
two cards and have up to 62 participants depending on access type. In  
the dual-card configuration, one card is the primary card, and the other  
is the secondary card. Each card can host single-card conferences of  
three to 32 participants, or a dual-card conference, which occupies  
ports on both cards.  
Note: There is no need for ICB cards in a dual-card configuration to  
reside next to each other in an IPE shelf. Software establishes the  
audio connections between the two cards. There is no hardware  
connection between the two cards.  
Datafill the following tables and command interfaces for dual-card  
configuration:  
• table LNINV  
• table ACDGRP  
• table ACDSGRP  
• table ACDRTE (requires a new entry)  
• table ACDLOGIN  
• table DNROUTE  
• table OFRT  
Figure 20 on page 61 provides an example of the datafill for dual-card  
setup.  
Note: If single-number access is being used, DN pairs are not  
required. Instead configure two single-number access DNs: one for  
callers to use to access simple conferences on the primary card and  
one for callers to use to access simple conferences on the secondary  
card.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation and configuration 61  
Figure 20  
Dual-card conference, 1 conference, 62 ports  
Table DNROUTE  
ICB1  
997-1400  
Table DNROUTE  
Chairperson DN for  
dual meeting  
ICB1  
997-1402  
Table OFRT  
601 997-1400  
32 ACD  
agents  
assigned to  
ICB1  
ACDGRP  
ICB Card  
Table DNROUTE  
Transfer DN  
ICB2  
997-1404  
Table DNROUTE  
ICB1  
ICB1  
997-1601  
997-1602  
997-1603  
997-1604  
997-1605  
997-1606  
997-1607  
997-1608  
997-1609  
997-1701  
997-1702  
997-1703  
997-1704  
997-1705  
997-1706  
997-1707  
997-1708  
997-1709  
ICB2  
Link DN  
997-1405  
Table DNROUTE  
Dual-Card Conference DN  
ICB1  
Not used for dual  
card conference  
997-1401  
Table DNROUTE  
ICB2  
997-1500  
Table OFRT  
601 997-1500  
32 ACD  
agents  
ICB Card  
assigned to  
ICB2  
ACDGRP  
Table DNROUTE  
ICB2  
ICB2  
997-1801  
997-1802  
997-1803  
997-1804  
997-1805  
997-1806  
997-1807  
997-1808  
997-1809  
997-1901  
997-1902  
997-1903  
997-1904  
997-1905  
997-1906  
997-1907  
997-1908  
997-1909  
Not used for dual  
card conference  
G100017  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
62 Installation and configuration  
Service Orders  
Add an additional ACD group for the second card.  
Figure 21  
ACDGRP example  
ACDNAME CUSTGRP ACDRNGTH THROUTE NSROUTE PRIOPRO DBG  
MAXCQSIZ MAXWAIT ACDMIS MSQS DISTRING OBSWTONE FRCNGTSV  
OPTIONS  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------  
MICB2 BNRRCH 12 OFRT 601 OFRT 601 0 Y 2 0 N N NONE N N (ACDDISP 4)  
(NONIMCUT ) $  
Add additional ACD subgroup information for the second card.  
Figure 22  
ACDSGRP example  
ACDGROUP SUBGROUP RECORDER  
--------------------------------------------------------  
MICB2 1 NONE  
Add additional login IDs for the second card agent logins. These login  
IDs must be in sequential order.  
Figure 23  
ACDLOGIN example  
CUSTGRP  
BNRRCH  
PSWD  
N
OPTIONS  
$
LOGINID  
1234  
N
Add table DNROUTE to provide DNs for the following:  
• second ICB card (for single-card conference and chairperson)  
• transfer DN (to transfer conference calls from ICB card 1 to ICB card  
2)  
• link DN (provides speech path between the two cards)  
• 62-port Main conference DN  
• chairperson DN for ICB card 1  
Note: From all of these DNs, part are for the primary card and the  
rest are for the secondary card. However, when configuring these  
DNs in the ICB BUI, all dual-card DNs are configured on the  
primary card.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation and configuration 63  
Figure 24  
DNROUTE example  
AREACODE OFCCODE STNCODE DNRESULT  
------------------------------------------------------------------  
214 997 1600 FEAT ACD MICB2 PRIM 0 0  
214 997 1401 FEAT ACD MICB1 SUPP 0 (Used for Dual Card MAIN Conference)  
214 997 1402 FEAT ACD MICB1 SUPP 0 (Used for Dual Card Card 1 chairperson)  
214 997 1403 FEAT ACD MICB2 SUPP 0 (Used for Dual Card Card 2 chairperson)  
214 997 1404 FEAT ACD MICB2 SUPP 0 (Used for Dual Card Transfer DN)  
214 997 1405 FEAT ACD MICB2 SUPP 0 (Used for Dual Card Link DN)  
214 997 1802 FEAT ACD MICB2 SUPP 0 (Used for single card conferences)  
214 997 1803 FEAT ACD MICB2 SUPP 0 (Used for single card conferences)  
.......cont until # of ports needed are configured  
Note: The DNs in bold are only required when using single access DNs.  
Use table ACDRTE to allow a dual-card conference to overflow from  
ICB card 1 to ICB card 2 when there are no more available ports on card  
1.  
Figure 25  
ACDRTE example  
ACDGRP  
MICB1  
OPTNAME  
OVFL OVFL  
OPTION  
(MICB 2)  
Use table OFRT to add the DN routing for the second ICB card.  
Figure 26  
OFRT example  
RTE RTELIST  
---------------------  
601 (RT 214 NP LCL 9971600 Y N $) $  
Configuration procedure  
To set up a dual-card configuration using direct meeting access, follow  
the steps in Procedure 3 on page 64.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
64 Installation and configuration  
Procedure 3  
Configure a dual-card conference  
1
Install the two cards and their Ethernet adapters identical to single-card  
installation. See Procedure 4 on page 66.  
Note: There is no need for the two cards to be next to each other in the  
shelf or cabinet.  
2
3
Busy and Return to Service (RTS) the two cards in the IPE PM level of the  
MAP terminal.  
For each card, connect a VT100 terminal to the card and enter the keycode  
information, including the appropriate number of ports. Wait for each card to  
verify the keycode information.  
4
For each card, log into the card through the CLI (default login: admin). Enter  
the System Attributes Editor, enter sa then sy, and modify the following  
information:  
The subnet mask, the gateway address, and the IP address  
Note: After entering the Ethernet information, the CLI asks if you want to  
restart the cards. Select YES at this point.  
5
From a PC, ping each ICB card to make sure that they have a correct  
connection to the LAN. To ping an IP card, perform the following:  
a
b
Click on the Start button and select Run from the Start Menu.  
In the Open: field, enter ping <IP address> where <IP address> is the  
IP address of one of the ICB cards.  
c
Click the OK button, and observe the DOS window that opens. If you  
receive the message: “Reply from <IP address>..., you have set up the  
LAN connection correctly and you can continue. If you receive the  
message: “Request timed out”, there is a problem with the LAN  
connection.  
6
7
Configure the DNs for the dual-card configuration.  
Configure each port on the two new cards as an M2616 set. See Procedure  
2 on page 56. Refer to SERVORD information in Figure 18 on page 59.  
8
9
Open up the web browser on your PC. In the URL field of the browser, enter  
the following: <IP address> where < IP address> is the ICB IP address.  
Log into the BUI (defaults: admin and 000000) and select the ICB Installation  
This procedure is now complete  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation and configuration 65  
ICB installation and configuration procedures  
Once the site is prepared for installation and the Meridian system  
software is configured, use the steps in Table 11 to complete the ICB  
installation.  
Table 11  
ICB installation summary  
Step  
1
Description  
Install a serial Maintenance terminal for preliminary card setup using the following  
procedures:  
Use one of the following three procedures to connect the serial Maintenance terminal to the  
ICB as follows:  
If your system is an CS 1000 or Option 11C, use one of the following three procedures to  
connect the serial Maintenance terminal to the ICB as follows:  
2
3
Install the ICB card(s) using the following:  
Configure the Maintenance terminal for command line interface (CLI) access as follows:  
Define the ICB Ethernet parameters using the CLI System Attributes Editor as follows:  
5
Complete the installation using the ICB BUI Install Wizard as follows:  
See “ICB Installation Wizard” on page 72 for a description of how to configure the ICB  
card(s) using the Install Wizard.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
66 Installation and configuration  
Procedure 4  
Install the Ethernet Adapter card  
1
2
3
Remove the cover plate from the I/O panel at the rear of the IPE module.  
Remove the I/O panel retaining screws and lift the I/O panel from the module.  
Set up the I/O panel filter connector for the card slot you have assigned for  
the ICB card installation.  
4
Your next step depends on the configuration of that filter connector.  
a
If this connector has a permanent connection to the backplane cable,  
remove the filter connector from the I/O panel.  
b
If a 50-pin connector joins the filter connector and the backplane cable,  
disconnect the 50-pin connector from the I/O panel filter connector. Then,  
being careful to save the retaining screws, remove the filter connector  
from the I/O panel.  
5
Install the NT5D52AC Ethernet Adapter card into the selected I/O panel  
connector cutout using the saved retaining screws.  
6
7
Fasten the I/O panel to the module using the retaining screws.  
Replace the module cover plate.  
This procedure is now complete  
Table 12 lists the pin number assignments for the Maintenance terminal  
cable that connects the IPE module I/O panel that the following  
procedures use. The cable connects to the nullmodem for direct  
terminal connection or to a modem for a remote maintenance terminal.  
Table 12  
Maintenance cable  
J2 DB-25 pin  
J1 50-pin  
Description  
Reserved  
RS-232 Tx  
RS-232 Rx  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
GND  
J2 DB-25 pin  
J1 50-pin  
48  
Description  
LAN_Rx-  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
1
2
25  
22  
20  
18  
10  
16  
21  
17  
11  
24  
49  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
13  
3
14  
4
15  
5
36  
6
37  
7
19  
8
Reserved  
Reserved  
LAN_Tx+  
LAN_Tx-  
38  
9
39  
10  
11  
40  
41  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installation and configuration 67  
Table 12  
Maintenance cable (Continued)  
J2 DB-25 pin  
J1 50-pin  
Description  
Reserved  
LAN_Rx+  
J2 DB-25 pin  
J1 50-pin  
Description  
12  
13  
12  
23  
25  
N.C.  
Not Connected  
VT100) in the following procedures.  
Figure 27  
Terminal connection through the Ethernet Adapter  
I/O Panel  
1
DB-25  
Maintenance Terminal  
Backplane  
A0601464  
Cable  
DB-9  
2
RJ-45  
Modem  
ICB Card  
RJ-45  
Cable  
3
Ethernet  
Adapter  
Hub  
Backplane  
Cable  
1
2
3
Indicate three ways of connecting the terminal.  
G100013  
Procedure 5  
Access the ICB directly  
1
2
Position the Maintenance terminal on a desk near the system.  
Verify that the Ethernet Adapter card is on the I/O panel as described in  
3
Plug the terminal cable DB-9 female connector into the DB-9 male connector  
on the Ethernet Adapter card on the I/O panel.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
68 Installation and configuration  
4
Plug the DB-25 male connector at the other end of the terminal cable into the  
RS-232 connector on the terminal. A nullmodem is not required. If a gender  
changer is required, purchase one from a local electronics store.  
This procedure is now complete  
Procedure 6  
Access the ICB remotely using a modem  
1
2
3
Verify that the Ethernet Adapter card is on the I/O panel as described in  
Plug the terminal cable DB-9 female connector into the DB-9 male connector  
on the Ethernet Adapter card on the I/O panel.  
Plug the DB-25 male connector at the other end of the terminal cable into the  
DB-25 female connector of a DB-25F/DB-25M nullmodem adapter. If a  
female-to-female nullmodem is required, use a customer-supplied  
nullmodem.  
4
Plug the DB-25 male connector of the nullmodem adapter DB-25F/DB-25M  
into the DB-25 female connector on the modem. If a female-to-female  
nullmodem is required, use a customer-supplied nullmodem.  
5
6
Plug the modular modem cable RJ11 plug into the RJ11 jack on the modem.  
Plug the other end of the modular modem cable RJ11 plug into the RJ11 jack  
on the wall.  
This procedure is now complete  
Procedure 7  
Access the ICB remotely using a LAN hub  
1
2
3
4
Verify that the Ethernet Adapter card is on the I/O panel as described in  
Plug the modular cable RJ-45 plug into the RJ-45 jack on the NT5D52AC  
Ethernet Adapter card.  
Plug the RJ-45 plug at the other end of the modular cable into the Ethernet  
LAN hub.  
Make the remaining Ethernet connections as required using standard  
Ethernet connection rules.  
Note: For local testing purposes, or direct connection from the Ethernet port to a  
PC, use an Ethernet cross-over cable purchased at a local computer store.  
This procedure is now complete  
If installing the ICB card in an Option 11C or CS 1000, use the following  
procedures to connect the Maintenance terminal.  
Note: These procedures do not apply to the Meridian 1 Options  
51C, 61C or 81C or the CS 2100/Meridian SL-100.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installation and configuration 69  
In the procedures that follow, the connections are the same for the  
Option 11C and the CS 1000, the only difference is that the connectors  
are on the back of the Call Server and Media Gateway for the CS 1000,  
whereas they are on the bottom of the Option 11C cabinet.  
Table 13 describes the DB-9 pin assignment that the next two  
procedures use.  
Table 13  
DB-9 RS-232 port pin out  
9-pin (male) serial connector pin #  
Signal Description  
RS-232 TX (transmit)  
RS-232 RX (receive)  
GND  
2
3
5
Procedure 8  
Access the ICB directly – Option 11C or CS 1000  
1
2
Position the Maintenance terminal on a desk near the system.  
If the system is an Option 11C perform the following:  
a
b
Verify that the Ethernet Adapter is installed in the Option 11C.  
Plug the terminal cable DB-9 female connector into the DB-9 male  
connector on the Ethernet Adapter on the I/O panel.  
c
Plug the DB-25 male connector at the other end of the terminal cable into  
the RS-232 connector on the terminal. If the connection requires a  
gender changer, obtain one at a local electronics store.  
3
If your system is a CS 1000, connect the NTBK48 three-port SDI cable to the  
9-pin SDI connection (COM RS-232) at the back of the Call Server and Media  
Gateway.  
This procedure is now complete  
Procedure 9  
Access the ICB remotely using a modem – Option 11C or CS 1000  
1
2
Verify that the Ethernet Adapter/Medium Access Unit (MAU) is installed in the  
Option 11C or CS 1000. Insert the industry-standard MAU into the Ethernet  
Connection on the back of the Call Server and Media Gateway.  
Note: The Ethernet MAU comes with the cable kits for the Call Server and Media  
Gateway.  
Plug the terminal cable DB-9 female connector into the DB-9 male connector  
on the Ethernet Adapter/MAU on the I/O panel.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
70 Installation and configuration  
3
Plug the DB-25 male connector at the other end of the terminal cable into the  
DB-25 female connector of the customer-supplied DB-25F/DB-25M  
nullmodem adapter.  
4
Plug the DB-25 male connector of the DB-25F/DB-25M nullmodem adapter  
into the DB-25 female connector on the modem.  
5
6
Insert the modular RJ11 plug into the RJ11 jack on the modem.  
Insert the other end of the RJ11 plug into the RJ11 jack on the wall.  
This procedure is now complete  
Procedure 10  
Access the ICB remotely using a LAN hub – Option 11C or CS 1000  
1
Verify that the Ethernet Adapter/MAU is installed in the Option 11C or CS  
1000. Insert the industry-standard MAU into the Ethernet Connection on the  
back of the Call Server and Media Gateway.  
Note: The MAU comes with the cable kits for the Call Server and Media  
Gateway.  
2
Insert the modular cable RJ-45 plug into the RJ-45 jack on the Ethernet  
Adapter/MAU.  
3
4
Insert the RJ-45 plug at the other end of the modular cable into the LAN hub.  
Make the rest of the Ethernet connections as required using standard  
Ethernet connection rules.  
This procedure is now complete  
Procedure 11  
Install ICB cards  
1
2
Identify the card slots selected for ICB card(s). Refer to Table 4 on page 46.  
Make sure to properly place the PCMCIA hard drive card in the lower  
faceplate PCMCIA slot.  
3
4
Pull the top and bottom extractors away from the ICB faceplate.  
Insert the ICB card into the card guides and carefully push it until it makes  
contact with the backplane connector.  
5
6
Push the top and the bottom extractors towards the faceplate to insert the ICB  
card into the faceplate connector and to lock it in place.  
Observe the red LED at the top of the faceplate (the card LED).  
This LED blinks three times after the self-test successfully completes. When  
the ICB software loads, the LED blinks three more times and then remains lit.  
This takes approximately 45 seconds.  
7
Repeat Steps 1 through 6 for each additional ICB card.  
This procedure is now complete  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installation and configuration 71  
Procedure 12  
Set up CLI access from the maintenance terminal  
1
2
Specify the VT-100 type terminal interface characteristics to make sure they  
are compatible with the ICB RS-232 interface.  
Set the interface parameters as follows:  
Transmission speed: 9600 bps  
Data bits: 8  
Stop bit: 1  
Parity: No  
Flow control: none  
Note: Do not use XON/XFF flow control.  
This procedure is now complete  
The next step is to define IP parameters using the CLI.  
Procedure 13  
Configure initial card parameters using the CLI  
1
2
3
Enter the key-code.  
Enter the card feature (Basic or Advanced).  
From the VT-100 type terminal press the Enter key.  
The logon window appears.  
4
5
At the login prompt, enter the following:  
admin  
The default password is blank. Press the Enter key at the password prompt.  
Access the System Administration menu. Enter:  
SA  
The System Administration menu opens.  
Access the System Attributes Editor. Enter:  
SY  
6
7
The System Attributes Editor opens.  
Enter the following IP attributes for the ICB card:  
IP address – The internet protocol address which has the same format as  
the gateway address.  
Subnet mask – The part of the IP address which represents a subnetwork  
within a network. The subnet mask has a format of XXX.XXX.XXX. XXX,  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
72 Installation and configuration  
where XXX is in the range 0-255. Subnet mask in binary presentation of  
32 bits has at least the first eight digits “1” and the last digit is “0”.  
Gateway address – Is in the XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX format, where every  
token is in the range 0-255.  
8
9
Enter S to save the parameters.  
Exit the CLI and proceed to Procedure 14. All other card configuration is  
performed from the BUI.  
This procedure is now complete  
Procedure 14  
Access the administration BUI  
1
Check the installation by doing the following:  
a
b
Run a browser, either Netscape or Microsoft Internet Explorer.  
In the location field, enter:  
http://<ICB IP address>  
c
d
Login as an administrator. The default ID and password are admin and  
carriage return (enter key).  
Proceed with the installation using the Installation Wizard (see below).  
This procedure is now complete  
ICB Installation Wizard  
Overview  
The ICB Installation Wizard provides an easy method for configuring  
new systems. Only a user who logs in as an administrator can use the  
Installation Wizard. An administrator accesses the Installation Wizard  
by clicking on the Install Wizard link on the BUI’s ICB Dashboard. For  
more information about accessing this tool, see, “Administration BUI”  
After completing a Wizard session, the administrator can try operating  
the card (that is, schedule a conference and place a call), so long as the  
Meridian system setup is complete. An administrator can return to the  
Wizard at any time to change system definitions.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Installation and configuration 73  
The Installation Wizard consists of four steps, each of which appears  
on a separate window. For a new installation, follow the Wizard  
step-by-step. For already installed systems, go directly to a specific  
window to modify one or more fields. The windows are as follows:  
1 Basic Card Settings – use this window when getting started. The  
Administrator must enter the time zone of the ICB card.  
2 Access Numbers – select the dialing method (that is, direct  
meeting or single-number) and enter the DNs according to Meridian  
system configuration.  
3 Define First User – define at least one user in order to perform  
sanity tests, such as scheduling conferences and placing calls. This  
step eliminates the need to go to a separate window to define a user  
after finishing using the Wizard, just to perform some testing.  
Because this step is required only during initial installation, the BUI  
excludes it (that is, grays it out) after a successful installation.  
Normal user administration is performed from a separate window in  
the Administration BUI.  
4 Dual Card Meetings – define the parameters for dual-card  
meetings. This step appears only in the primary card of a dual-card  
ICB configuration.  
Conventions  
All Installation Wizard windows list the steps on the left of the window.  
During installation advance step-by-step by clicking on the Submit &  
Continue button. After installation is complete, access a specific step  
directly by clicking on its name in the list.  
Step 1 – Basic Card Settings  
Figure 28 on page 74 shows the Basic Card Settings window. Click on  
the Install Wizard link on the ICB Dashboard to access this window.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
74 Installation and configuration  
Figure 28  
Installation Wizard: Step 1 – Basic Card Settings window  
Submit this window to save  
the parameters in the card and  
continue to the next step.  
Submit this window to save the parameters in the  
card and return to the dashboard.  
Note: The system disables this button during a first  
installation that is not yet complete. The button is active  
when visiting this window to modify parameters  
after installation.  
Table 14 describes the parameters, from top to bottom, of the Basic  
Card Settings window.  
Table 14  
Basic Card Settings parameters  
Item  
Description  
Name  
Enter the card’s name.  
Range: Free text up to 20 characters.  
IP Address  
Shows the IP address of the card, which appears as view only.  
Note: Define the card address using the CLI.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installation and configuration 75  
Table 14  
Basic Card Settings parameters (Continued)  
Item  
Description  
Type  
Define the card’s configuration type as follows:  
Single card (stand-alone).  
Primary card in a dual-card pair.  
Secondary card in a dual-card pair.  
Note 1: Dual-card meeting configuration in Step 4 uses this information. If information is  
changed here, a window opens reminding you to change the settings of a dual-card meeting.  
Note 2: When an ICB card of type “single” already configured with 10 DNs pairs is changed  
to “primary” or “secondary”, one of the DN pairs must be deleted. This is because in a  
dual-card set one DN pair is reserved for the dual meeting configured in Step 4. The ICB  
attempts to find a free DN pair (that is, with no conferences scheduled on it) and deletes it.  
If no such DN is found, the ICB deletes the DN pair with the fewest conferences. In this case,  
a confirmation box appears that allows the administrator to confirm or cancel the whole  
operation.  
Note 3: When a “primary” or “secondary” card is changed to be “single”, all dual meetings  
are changed to simple meetings and their port size is reduced to the capacity of this card.  
Default  
Conference  
Language  
Determine the default voice-prompt language for conferences and the TUI. When  
scheduling a conference, users can select a language from the available set, but if  
the user does not specify a language this parameter applies.  
Default: American English.  
Time Zone  
Select the appropriate time zone for the ICB card. If this field is not entered,  
conferences will not be scheduled at the proper times.  
IP address of  
E-mail Server  
Enter the IP address of the server that the ICB uses to send scheduling  
confirmation and administration E-mail messages. If this field is left empty, or an  
incorrect address is specified, the ICB will not send E-mail messages. However, the  
rest of the system will operate properly.  
Note: The E-mail server must support the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP).  
“From” E-mail  
address, by  
which the ICB  
identifies itself  
Enter the E-mail address which the ICB uses to identify itself when sending E-mails.  
This item appears in the “From:” field of sent E-mails.  
Note 1: Some E-mail servers require this information as a mandatory field. It cannot be  
empty, but it can be a non-existent address. Some servers will not deliver the E-mail if it is  
not correct.  
Note 2: ICB never receives E-mails, so it does not require an address. However, the “from”  
address is used when returned mail occurs (for example, someone replies to the ICB’s  
E-mail or the network returns an undeliverable E-mail). If the address is unreal, the returned  
mail is not delivered. If the “from” address is someone’s real address, they will receive the  
ICB’s returned mail.  
Automatic Call  
Distribution  
Define the ACD setup according to the Meridian system ACD configuration.  
Use an agent ID – Indicate whether ACD is configured with the agent ID option. If  
yes, enter the four-digit agent ID of the first ICB port in the adjacent text box. The  
other ports use the succeeding agent IDs.  
Use multiple queue assignment – Indicate if ACD is configured with the  
multiple-queue option. An entry is required, because this option affects the agent  
login process which the system applies to the ports.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
76 Installation and configuration  
Step 2 – Access Numbers  
Use this step to define the access method, direct meeting or  
single-number, and the DNs according to Meridian system  
configuration. Figure 29 shows the Access Numbers window.  
Figure 29  
Installation Wizard: Step 2 – Access Numbers window  
Discard input and  
return to previous step.  
Submit this window to save the parameters in the  
card and return to the dashboard.  
Note: The system disables this button during a first  
installation that is not yet complete. The button is active  
Submit this window to save  
the parameters in the card and  
continue to the next step.  
when visiting this window to modify parameters  
after installation.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installation and configuration 77  
Table 15 describes the parameters, from top to bottom, of the Access  
Numbers window. Configure all the DNs in this window according to  
Meridian system configuration.  
Table 15  
Access Numbers parameters  
Item  
Description  
Use a single  
access number  
Enter the single DN to use for accessing all conferences.  
Use a list of  
access numbers  
This field requires a list of DN pairs, because with direct meeting access users  
dial the conference DN and then the chairperson DN to enter the meeting. The  
number of DNs defined equals the maximum number of simultaneous  
conferences allowed. Configure up to 10 DN pairs.  
Note: Define only nine DN pairs for primary or secondary cards in a dual-card set. One  
DN must be reserved pair for dual-card meetings (see “Step 4 – Dual Card Meetings”  
Delete DNs by clicking on a table cell and pressing the Delete key, which leaves  
the cell empty. DNs that are in use by a future or current conference cannot be  
deleted; an error message appears when submitting the form.  
When upgrading from MICB Release 2, the system uses the same table. The old  
DN pairs appear in the table.  
Assistance DN  
TUI DN  
Enter the DN of an operator or attendant. The system dials this DN when the  
chairperson in an active conference selects “call assistant” from the TUI or BUI.  
Enter the DN to access TUI services.  
Step 3 – Define First User  
This step appears only during a new installation. Use this window to  
define a new user for testing the ICB after completing installation. The  
user defined here can be deleted, or modified, from the regular User  
Administration window.  
This window is identical to the “new user” window (see Figure 61 on  
page 121), except it includes the Wizard step titles at the top of the  
window. The action buttons are the same as in Step 2, except that the  
Finish button only appears in the case of a single-card ICB.  
Step 4 – Dual Card Meetings  
Configure the parameters for a dual-card meeting in this window. This  
step appears only when the card is a member of a dual-card set (that  
is, the configuration type selected in Step 1 is either “Dual Card –  
Primary” or “Dual Card – Secondary”). Inputting data in this window is  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
78 Installation and configuration  
allowed only on the primary card; on the secondary card this window  
appears as view only.  
Note: The secondary ICB card must be installed and configured  
first. Dual-card meeting parameters and DNs are defined in the  
primary ICB only. The primary ICB sends the relevant information to  
the secondary ICB. Therefore, the secondary ICB must be connected  
to the LAN and operational when the primary is being configured.  
All DNs must be configured in the Meridian system.  
Table 16 describes the parameters, from top to bottom, of the Dual Card  
Meetings window.  
Table 16  
Dual Card Meetings parameters  
Item  
Description  
IP address of  
secondary card  
Enter the IP address of the secondary card.  
Conference  
access number  
Enter the DN of the dual-card meeting. Callers will dial this number to access the  
dual-card meeting.  
Chairperson  
number in  
primary card  
Enter the chairperson DN for the dual-card meeting. The chairperson uses this  
number to access the dual-card meeting.  
Transfer number  
Link number  
Enter the DN that the ICB uses to transfer calls from the primary card to the  
secondary card. The system hides this number from end users.  
Enter the DN that the ICB uses to create a voice path between both cards. The  
system hides this number from end users.  
Chairperson  
control of dual  
meeting  
For more information see, “Dual-card meeting” on page 104.  
Full control including secondary card – If this is clicked, the chairperson  
commands apply to both cards. In this case, the maximum conference size in a  
64-port card pair is 60 ports.  
Control of secondary card is limited – If this is clicked, some chairperson  
commands are limited to the primary card (for example, TUI roll call command  
and dial out). The maximum conference size in a 64-port card pair is 62 ports.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
79  
Browser user interface  
Purpose  
This chapter describes how to use the browser user interface (BUI), a  
web-based application, for conference scheduling, chairperson  
operations, and system administration.  
The chapter contains the following sections:  
“Overview” on page 79 – introduces the browser user interface  
and its system requirements.  
“Scheduling BUI” on page 86 – describes the interface that users  
and super-users can use to schedule conferences.  
“Chairperson operations” on page 98 – describes the interface  
that a chairperson can use to control an active conference.  
“Administration BUI” on page 105 – describes the interface that  
an administrator uses for ICB configuration and administration.  
Overview  
The HTML/HTTP based BUI provides a fast response time and  
supports 20 active BUI users in a direct LAN connection. The BUI  
supports open access from anywhere in the Internet, even behind  
gateways and firewalls. Access the ICB web server over an Ethernet  
connection. To access the ICB server, use the following internet  
browsers:  
• Microsoft Internet Explorer, version 4.01 or higher.  
• Netscape Communicator, version 4.5 or higher.  
Note: The system does not support browsers running on MacIntosh  
computers.  
The ICB web server runs on the ICB card. The ICB card acts as a  
stand-alone system. Users navigate their browser directly to the card’s  
IP address.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
80 Browser user interface  
User types  
When logging in to the ICB BUI, your login ID connects you to the server  
as a distinct user type. The administrator determines the user type for  
each user. Table 17 shows the user types and their functionality.  
Table 17  
BUI user types  
User type  
Description  
User  
A user can reserve meetings under their account, and modify and delete these  
meetings. Users can see only the meetings that they schedule.  
Super-user  
In addition to normal user functions, a super-user can reserve meetings under other  
users’ accounts. A super-user can modify and delete the meetings of other users.  
Super-users can see all meetings.  
Administrator  
The administrator manages ICB system parameters and resources such as user IDs  
and group-call tables.  
Executive  
User  
In addition to normal user functions, an executive user can view, but not change, all  
meetings of other users.  
Log into the BUI  
Figure 30 shows the first window that appears when reaching the BUI.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Browser user interface 81  
Figure 30  
ICB home page layout  
The only possible action from this window is to click on the LOGIN  
button.  
Procedure 15  
Login to the BUI  
1
Click on the LOGIN button.  
The window in Figure 31 appears.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
82 Browser user interface  
Figure 31  
Login dialog box (Internet Explorer)  
2
3
Enter your login ID in the “User name” field. To log into the administrator BUI,  
enter an administrator ID.  
Enter your password in the “Password” field. When logging in the first time,  
enter six zeroes (000000). To log into the administrator BUI, enter an  
administrator password.  
4
Click on the OK button.  
If your login is unsuccessful, the system re-displays the dialog box. After a  
pre-defined number of unsuccessful logins, the system blocks the user.  
Note: To find a missing password, see “Appendix A: Password security” on  
5
The main window opens. See Figure 32 for a depiction.  
Figure 32  
Main ICB screen  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Browser user interface 83  
This procedure is now complete  
Depending on the login ID type, Table 18 shows the windows that open  
when entering the BUI.  
Table 18  
Login entry point  
Login entry  
BUI Application  
Regular, super-user, or  
executive user ID  
Scheduling BUI.  
Schedule meetings from this window.  
Administrator user ID  
ICB Dashboard.  
This window opens the administration dashboard, from which the  
administration of system resources and options, such as users,  
permanent conferences, conference access numbers etc., can be  
performed.  
Meeting chairperson  
number and password  
Meeting Control window.  
This window allows a chairperson to control an active meeting.  
Login password change  
Follow the steps in Procedure 16 to change passwords after logging in.  
Procedure 16  
Change your login password  
1
Click on the change Change Password button on the first window that opens  
after logging in (see Figure 32 on page 82).  
Note: Change Password is a link on the Dashboard.  
The window in Figure 33 opens.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
84 Browser user interface  
Figure 33  
Change password window  
2
3
Enter the current password for authentication, then the new password. Enter  
the new password a second time for confirmation.  
The passwords do not appear when entered (asterisks appear).  
Click on the Submit button to apply the changes. Click on the Cancel button  
to abort the changes.  
In both cases, the system returns to the previous window.  
This procedure is now complete  
Customize the BUI home page and title bar  
Initially, the ICB home page comes with a set format. The Customized  
BUI Home Page and Title Bar feature enables administrators to add a  
customer-designed image to the home page and a company logo to the  
title bar. The title bar is fixed through the entire BUI session.  
The following are the prerequisites for using this feature:  
• The image must fit reasonably in the browser window. Nortel  
Networks recommends that the image be no larger than 690 pixels  
wide and 420 pixels high.  
• The logo must be no larger than 124 pixels wide and 40 pixels high.  
• The image must be in GIF format.  
The ICB Dashboard provides a tool for uploading and installing the  
customer’s images (see “Company images upload” on page 116).  
Fixed title frame  
Figure 34 shows the fixed title frame that appears on top of all  
conferences. Subsequent screen captures do not show this frame.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Browser user interface 85  
Figure 34  
BUI fixed title frame  
Logout button – terminates the session and  
returns to the home page login window.  
Space for optional customer logo  
ICB logo  
Print button –  
prints the current  
window.  
Nortel  
Networks  
Logo  
User name, date,  
and time of ICB  
Help button – displays user  
help relevant to the current  
window. Help displays in a  
separate browser window.  
Help window  
Clicking on the Help button on the title frame opens a separate browser  
window in which it displays the Help window. This enables users to  
continue with BUI operations while the on-line help is open. The  
following three different help files exist, according to user type and role:  
• User, Super-User, and Executive help (scheduling windows)  
• Chairperson control help (chairperson control window)  
• Administrator help (only an administrator can view this help)  
The Help window has two frames; topic links appear on the left and help  
text appears on the right. Click on an item in the left frame help topics  
to access information about the required topic.  
Click on the Close window link to close the Help window.  
Note: To view help text, Adobe Acrobat must be installed on the  
computer.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
86 Browser user interface  
Scheduling BUI  
Figure 35 shows the navigation between the Scheduling BUI windows.  
Figure 35  
Scheduling BUI navigation flowchart  
ICB Home Page  
ICB Home Page  
LOGIN  
Login dialog box  
OK  
Meeting's list  
Meeting Control  
Delete  
Edit  
New Conference  
Meeting control  
window  
Scheduler (New/Edit)  
Show ports  
availability  
Set Conference  
Reset  
Cancel  
Is  
Error window  
No  
Yes  
Confirmation window  
scheduling  
successful?  
Edit  
OK  
OK  
G100083  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Browser user interface 87  
Meetings List window  
Figure 36 shows the Meeting List window that appears directly after  
user login. This window displays a table of the user’s meetings and  
provides access to scheduling operations.  
Figure 36  
Meetings List window (super-user’s display)  
Next period – displays the  
next range of days specified  
in the “for” selection.  
Previous period – displays the  
previous range of days specified  
in the “for” selection.  
Today – takes the current date as starting  
day and re-displays the table.  
The user can modify the date and/or the number of days and click the GO button to show a different list.  
If this window is accessed by a user, the window displays the  
conferences scheduled by that user only. If this window is accessed by  
a super-user, the window displays all scheduled conferences. The  
system sorts the list by time. The list includes conferences that begin  
on the previous day, but finish on the specified date. In this case, the  
system displays the conference on the top of the list.  
The maximum number of conferences per page is 10. When the list of  
conferences is longer than one page, click on the “Next 10” or “Previous  
10” links to view additional conferences.  
For each conference, click on the corresponding icon next to the  
conference to perform the following:  
Pencil icon – edit the conference (or just view all details).  
X icon – delete the conference (the BUI automatically updates the  
display).  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
88 Browser user interface  
Copy icon – conference details are copied from the existing  
conference.  
Gavel icon – jump to the “Meeting Control” window for an active  
conference (the icon appears only for active conferences).  
The BUI can display past conferences, up to the “aging” factor that an  
administrator defines (see Figure 53 on page 108). When a conference  
reaches the aging factor, the conference is deleted from the list.  
A super-user and executive-user can view permanent conferences, but  
cannot edit or delete them. Therefore, the system does not display the  
Edit and Delete icons next to permanent conferences that are not  
accessed by an administrator.  
Table 19 describes the columns in the Meeting List window.  
Table 19  
Meeting List window fields  
Field  
Description  
Conference title  
Shows the subject text that appears when scheduling a meeting. It can be empty.  
Shows the number of ports reserved for this meeting.  
Number of  
participants  
Date  
Shows the conference date. For permanent conferences, the date shows  
“Permanent”. For recurrent conferences, the letter “R” follows the date.  
Start time  
Shows the conference start time. For permanent conferences, this fields is empty.  
Shows the conference duration. For permanent conferences, this fields is empty.  
Shows the conference access number (DN).  
Duration  
Dialing access  
Chairperson  
access  
Shows the chairperson access number.  
Owner  
Shows the name of the person who scheduled the conference. This column  
appears only for super-users, because they can view all meetings. When a  
super-user schedules a conference and assigns another user in the “owner” field,  
that user becomes owner of the conference and their name appears here.  
Edit  
Click on the Edit icon to open a window for editing this conference. The window  
opens with the selected item’s parameters  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Browser user interface 89  
Table 19  
Meeting List window fields (Continued)  
Field  
Description  
Delete  
Click on the Delete icon to delete this conference. When the Delete icon is clicked,  
the following confirmation dialog box appears:  
If the conference is active, the following additional line appears before this  
question: “Warning! this conference is active.”  
Copy  
Click on the Copy icon to open a window for copying values from this conference.  
The window opens with the selected item’s parameters. The copy icon is not  
displayed for Permanent or Ad-hoc conferences.  
Control  
The Control icon applies to active conferences only. Click on the gavel icon to open  
the Meeting Control window for this conference.  
To schedule a new conference, click on the New Conference button on  
the top left-hand corner of the window. A new window appears (see  
Scheduling window  
Click on the New Conference button, or click on the edit icon (a pencil),  
in the row of an already scheduled conference to open the Scheduling  
window.  
General section  
Figure 37 on page 90 shows the scheduling window when it first opens.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
90 Browser user interface  
Figure 37  
Scheduling window – Schedule a New Conference  
Submit the request for execution.  
The system responds with either  
the Confirmation window or an  
Error window.  
Discard all input and re-display  
default values (or existing values to Meetings List window.  
if in editing mode).  
Discard input and return  
All fields have defaults, but users typically select the date and time, and  
number of participants. The system provides defaults for the other  
parameters or generates the values automatically.  
After scheduling a conference, view the Scheduling Confirmation  
window to verify the entries. See Figure 42 on page 97 for an example.  
Table 20 describes the fields in the Scheduling window, by section.  
Table 20  
Scheduling window fields  
Field  
Description  
General section  
Subject  
Enter text that describes the purpose of the conference.  
Range: Enter up to 20 characters or leave this field empty.  
Default: Empty.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Browser user interface 91  
Table 20  
Scheduling window fields (Continued)  
Field  
Description  
Number of  
participants  
Enter the number of ports to reserve for this conference, including the  
chairperson ports. The application makes sure that the total number of reserved  
ports for this time period does not exceed system capacity. The system performs  
validation after submission. Preview port availability by opening the “Free Ports”  
expanded window.  
Range: 3 to 32.  
Default: 4  
Dual meeting link  
(not shown in  
90)  
Click here if a dual-card meeting is required. A similar window with the following  
dual-card meeting attributes opens:  
Up to 60 or 62 ports are available, depending on the configuration parameter  
“full chairperson control”.  
The “Access Numbers” section displays a fixed dual-card meeting DN, which  
cannot be changed.  
Search for User ID.  
Note: This link appears only on the primary ICB card in a dual-card set.  
Select date  
Select the date the conference starts from the pull-down menus or calendar icon  
(left of the pull-down menus). See Figure 38 on page 92 for a depiction of this  
icon.  
Range: Current day to one year ahead of current day.  
Default: Current day.  
Note: This field cannot be modified when editing an existing conference.  
Owner ID  
Enter the user ID of the user who scheduled the conference and has permission  
to delete or edit it. When the BUI displays this field to a regular user or an  
executive user, it shows that user’s ID is not editable. When the BUI displays this  
field to a super-user, the super-user can edit it.  
Chairperson  
Enter the name of the chairperson for the user’s reference.  
Range: Text up to 20 characters.  
Default: Empty.  
Free Ports section – see “Free Ports section” on page 93.  
Time section  
Start time  
Enter the time that the conference starts. The minutes box shows 15-minute  
increments (that is, 0, 15, 30, and 45).  
Range: Hours/15-minute increments.  
Default: Current time.  
The default value of the time field is rounded to the nearest 15 minutes according  
to the following rule:  
In the first 10 minutes of the interval, the system rounds the time off to the  
past. For example, if the time is 8:23, the box shows the time as 8:15. The  
system interprets this as an immediate conference.  
In the last five minutes of the interval, the system rounds it to the future  
15-minute value. For example, 8:26 appears as 8:30.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
92 Browser user interface  
Table 20  
Scheduling window fields (Continued)  
Field  
Description  
Duration  
Enter the duration of the conference.  
Range: Up to 12 hours in 15-minute increments (the selection box shows all  
possible values).  
Default: 1 hour.  
Access Numbers section  
DN pair usage  
option  
Select the access DN pair to use as follows:  
Automatically assigned (the default) – the ICB selects the DN pair; no user  
action is required.  
Choose a number – select a number from the list. The list shows pairs of  
numbers in the format: [conference (chairperson)]. The system checks the  
availability of the number when the form is submitted for execution. If the  
numbers are not available, the scheduling fails.  
Options section – see “Options section” on page 94.  
When the calendar icon is clicked (located next to the drop-down menu  
for the date), the calendar window opens as depicted in Figure 38. The  
meeting date can be selected by clicking the appropriate date on the  
calendar.  
Figure 38  
Calendar icon  
When in edit mode, the title of this window is: “Edit Conference”. The  
following fields cannot be modified when editing an inactive conference:  
• date  
• dual-card meeting option (that is, users cannot make a single-card  
conference dual and vice versa)  
• recurrent option  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Browser user interface 93  
Only the following fields can be edited during an active conference:  
• number of participants  
• duration  
• add ports as needed (under the Options section)  
Free Ports section  
Figure 39 shows the how the scheduling window is expanded after  
clicking on the Free Ports button for a regular meeting. The information  
in this window refers to the date set above it in the Scheduling window.  
The time scale covers 12 hours in 15-minute increments. Figure 40  
shows how the scheduling window is expanded after clicking on the  
Free Ports button for a dual-card meeting.  
Figure 39  
Scheduling window – Free Ports section for a regular meeting  
Click on the Arrow button to move the range. Each click moves  
the range four hours in the direction of the arrow clicked.  
The middle bar specifies the available ports for the time range that the rectangle covers.  
Two bars appear in the middle for dual-card conferences: one for each card.  
Figure 40  
Scheduling window – Free Ports section for a dual card meeting  
Click on the Arrow button to move the range. Each click moves  
the range four hours in the direction of the arrow clicked.  
The middle bar specifies the available ports for the time range that the rectangle covers.  
Two bars appear in the middle for dual-card conferences: one for each card.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
94 Browser user interface  
Options section  
Figure 41 shows how the scheduling window is expanded after clicking  
on the Options button.  
Figure 41  
Scheduling window – Options section  
Closes (collapses) the window while still showing the  
Scheduling window.  
Table 21 describes the fields in the Options section.  
Table 21  
Scheduling window – Options section fields  
Field  
Description  
Password section  
User Password  
Enter an optional password for the conference. If configured, callers must enter  
this password to join the conference. Available options are as follows:  
No password – no optional password.  
Automatically assigned – The system automatically generates the  
password. The administrator sets the password length from 4 to 8 digits.  
Choose a password – The user defines the password. The range is 4 to 8  
digits. The window shows the password as it is entered. The system does  
not check the password for uniqueness. Different conferences can use the  
same password.  
Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference  
setting.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Browser user interface 95  
Table 21  
Scheduling window – Options section fields (Continued)  
Field  
Description  
Chairperson  
Password  
Enter a password for chairperson authentication. This field has the same  
options as the user password.  
Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference  
setting.  
Recurrence section  
(Does not appear for dual-card conferences, because they do not support the recurrence option).  
Recurrence  
Use this checkbox to activate or de-activate the recurrence feature. The  
adjacent criteria applies when this box is checked.  
Note: The recurrence option is only available when a specific DN pair in the Basic  
window is selected. If a DN pair is not selected, a pop-up message instructs you to select  
the DN pair first.  
Recur Every  
Enter the recurrence interval.  
Available values: Day, workday, week, two-weeks, and month.  
Note: If the first conference is not a workday, the workday option is not available.  
End After  
Define the number of conference occurrences. Up to 52 occurrences can be  
defined, but they cannot be more than a year in advance.  
Verify button  
When this button is clicked, the system verifies port availability without actually  
setting them up. The system displays a result page that shows if there are  
resources available for each occurrence (see “Recurrent Meeting Verify Result  
General Options section  
Indication for entry  
and exit  
Define how the system announces when people enter or exit a conference. The  
following options are available from the pull-down menu:  
Play name on entry and name on exit.  
Play name on entry and tone on exit.  
Play tone on entry and tone on exit.  
Silence (no indication for entry or exit).  
Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference  
setting.  
Language  
Select the language the system uses for voice prompts during the conference.  
The pull-down menu offers the set of languages available in the system. The  
default is the ICB card’s default language that an administrator selects using the  
single-number access, the preferred language takes affect after the caller  
enters the conference ID and password. Before that the system uses the default  
language.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
96 Browser user interface  
Table 21  
Scheduling window – Options section fields (Continued)  
Field  
Description  
Add ports if needed When this box is checked, the system allows the meeting to expand beyond the  
number of reserved ports if more than the anticipated number of participants  
show up. The system adds ports only if there are enough ports available (that  
is, they are not reserved for another meeting).  
Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference  
setting.  
Keep one port for  
chairperson  
Click on this box to reserve a port for the chairperson. When all but one of the  
ports are occupied, and the chairperson has not yet dialed in, the remaining port  
is not available for a participant. If this box is not checked, the system uses the  
ports on a first-come, first-serve basis. In this case, if all the ports are taken up  
by participants, the system does not allow the chairperson to enter the  
conference.  
Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference  
setting.  
Scheduling Confirmation  
Figure 42 on page 97 shows the window that appears after successfully  
scheduling a new, or modifying an existing, meeting. The system  
displays the window after it stores the conference in the database.  
The BUI displays the conference details and selected options in the  
same layout as the Scheduling window.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Browser user interface 97  
Figure 42  
Scheduling Confirmation window  
Click on the OK  
button to accept  
the conference.  
The system returns  
to the Meetings  
List window.  
Click on the Edit Conference button to modify the conference. The  
system returns to the Scheduling window with the conference’s details displayed.  
In the case of a recurrent meeting, a Conference Dates section appears  
at the bottom of this window. The Conference Dates section lists the  
dates in which the conference is scheduled, including the first date  
specified in the meeting details (see Figure 43).  
Figure 43  
Recurrent Dates Confirmation window  
In the previous example, the system denied one date, because the  
ports were not available.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
98 Browser user interface  
Recurrent Meeting Verify Result window  
Figure 44 shows the window that the system displays when the Verify  
button is clicked when setting up a recurrent conference.  
Figure 44  
Recurrent Conference Verify Result window  
The window displays the success result for each date specified in the  
recurrence criteria. In the case of a failure, the system indicates the  
reason (for example, not enough ports or DN is already in use).  
Note: Editing the details of a recurrent conference only changes the  
conference for the selected day. All other occurrences of the  
recurrent conference are not changed.  
Chairperson operations  
Meeting Control window  
The Meeting Control window is available to the chairperson only. The  
chairperson can access it in the following ways:  
• From the LOGIN window, enter the chairperson access number and  
chairperson password of the active meeting.  
• From the Meetings List window, in the Control column click on the  
gavel icon next to an active meeting in the list.  
A window opens showing details of the specific meeting. Users cannot  
select another conference to control when this window is open.  
The BUI allows only one active window per meeting. The associated  
voice port is the one identified as chairperson by access number.  
Figure 45 on page 99 shows the window when a chairperson is on the  
call. There is a different window when there is no chairperson present  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Browser user interface 99  
Figure 45  
Meeting Control window – Active chairperson  
When this window is reached from the  
meeting list, click on this button to return  
to the Meetings List window.  
Updates and re-displays the window.  
Table 22 describes the options available in the Meeting Control window.  
Table 22  
Meeting Control window fields  
Field  
Description  
Conference section  
Add 15 minutes button  
Lock/Unlock button  
Click on this button to add 15 minutes to the conference duration. The  
chairperson can invoke this command any time during the meeting. If  
successful, the system updates the “Time Left” indication.  
Click on this button to toggle from being locked to unlocked (or vice  
versa).  
Session Management  
button  
Click on this button to open the session management window (see Figure  
46 on page 101). Use this window to set up voting and a question and  
answer session.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
100 Browser user interface  
Table 22  
Meeting Control window fields (Continued)  
Field  
Description  
Chairperson section  
Active chairperson  
If the chairperson joins the conference by dialing in, this field shows the  
CLID of the call, if available. If not available, the window displays “the  
number is unavailable”.  
If the chairperson joins the call by outdialing, this field shows the called  
number. This is part of the Acquire Chairperson Control feature.  
Mute/Unmute button  
Stop Music button  
Click on this button to toggle between muting and unmuting the  
chairperson’s voice port only. When muted, this button appears as  
“Unmute”.  
Click on this button to toggle between stopping and resuming music when  
alone in the meeting. When stopped, this button appears as “Resume  
Music”.  
Volume Control button  
Click on this button to open a volume control panel (see Figure 48 on  
page 103). Use this panel to increase or decrease the volume in hear  
and talk directions.  
Participants section  
Count & announce button Click on this button to announce to the conference the total number of  
participants, followed by participants’ names as recorded in the name  
entry.  
Mute all button  
Click on this button to mute all participants, except the chairperson. When  
muted, the button becomes “Unmute all”.  
Disconnect all button  
Click on this button to disconnect all participants, except the chairperson.  
When clicked, the BUI opens a dialog box (OK/CANCEL) to confirm this  
operation.  
Dial-out control  
1
2
Provides a radio button list to select the following type of dial-out: Add  
participant; Add a group (that is, Group Call); Assistant call.  
The Dial button starts call origination. After call origination, the system  
connects the chairperson to a private call with the called party. The  
window changes to two buttons relevant to this state: “Return with  
called party”; “Return without called party.”  
In addition, the following chairperson call-related buttons are disabled:  
Self Mute; Stop Music; Volume Control; Count & Announce, and Mute All.  
Participant’s List section  
(Shows a table of details and chairperson controls for each participant, excluding the chairperson.)  
Phone number  
Details  
CLID or called number.  
The chairperson can enter text in this field for personal reference (for  
example, the participant’s name). This information is added only to the  
Meeting Log event when the user leaves the conference call.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Browser user interface 101  
Table 22  
Meeting Control window fields (Continued)  
Field  
Description  
Call Type  
Shows dial-out, dial-in, or group call.  
Consult/End consultation Click on this button to invoke a private call with the participant. When in a  
button  
private call, an icon appears indicating this status. During a consultation,  
an icon appears beside “End consultation”.  
Mute/Unmute button  
Play name  
Mute or unmute an individual participant. When muted, an icon appears  
beside Unmute.  
Click on the icon to play the participant’s name as recorded by the name  
entry feature. The system plays the name on the chairperson’s desktop,  
not their telephone.  
Disconnect  
Volume  
Click this icon to disconnect the participant. Before disconnecting, the  
system displays a dialog box. The window shows: “Disconnect this  
participant?” with OK and Cancel buttons to click on.  
Click on this button to open a volume control panel (see Figure 50 on page  
105). Use this panel to increase or decrease the volume in hear and talk  
directions.  
The system updates the window automatically every two minutes.  
Session Management  
The chairperson can request a voting session or questions to be  
answered by the participants on the call. See Figure 46 for a depiction  
of the Session Management area.  
Figure 46  
Session Management Control Panel  
The chairperson can start a voting session by selecting the Start  
Voting button. See Figure 47 on page 102 for a depiction. Once voting  
is enabled, the button becomes End Voting to end the voting session.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
102 Browser user interface  
Figure 47  
Voting Session Control Panel  
Once voting is enabled, participants can vote using the DTMF  
commands. The chairperson enters the subject of the voting in the  
Subject box. For example, “Do we require a follow-up conference?” The  
subject area is free text and up to 100 characters can be entered.  
After the voting is ended, the chairperson is sent an e-mail. The e-mail  
contains the following information:  
• Meeting title  
• Meeting date  
• Meeting time  
• Meeting duration  
• Ending time of the voting  
• Voting subject  
• Voting results: number of Yes responses, number of No responses,  
and number who abstained  
The chairperson selects the Start Questions button to activate the  
question session with the participants. Once enabled, the button  
becomes End Questions. Also, the area is expanded to include:  
Total of questions Requested  
• Number of participants that have had their questions Answered  
• Number of participants Waiting to ask their questions  
Requests for questions (*85 DTMF command) appear as blinking  
question marks beside the participant’s name in the Participant List.  
The chairperson can un-mute the participant by pressing the un-mute  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Browser user interface 103  
button or the blinking question mark. The chosen participant receives  
the voice prompt “Please ask your question after the tone”.  
The chairperson can sort the participant list by question mark by  
pressing the “?” on the top left of the table. This sorts the list of  
participants by placing the participants waiting to ask questions first.  
Chairperson Volume Control  
The chairperson can change the hearing and listening volume for the  
chairperson by selecting the Volume Control button. See Figure 48 for  
a depiction.  
Figure 48  
Chairperson Volume Control Panel  
The two scales in the middle of this window show the current  
increase/decrease level for hear and talk directions. The middle of the  
scale is zero, which signifies no volume change. Click on one of the  
arrows to increase or decrease the volume. The colored rectangle in  
the scale advances one step for each arrow click.  
Click on the Reset Volume of all participants button to restore the  
initial volume level of all participants. The initial volume level is  
determined by the Administrator’s default conference settings.  
When no chairperson is present in the conference, the system disables  
call-related buttons (see Figure 49 on page 104).  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
104 Browser user interface  
Figure 49  
Meeting Control window – Chairperson not present  
The following features are unavailable in this mode:  
• Self mute/unmute  
• Stop/play music  
• Volume control  
• Dial out  
• Consult with participant  
After the chairperson joins the conference the window changes to the  
one that Figure 45 on page 99 shows.  
Dual-card meeting  
Commands that a chairperson operates from the BUI in a dual-card  
meeting apply to participants in both cards. The feature operates as  
follows in a dual-card conference:  
Dial-out to a specified number – dial-out works only with the “full  
chairperson control” configuration option. If limited control is  
selected, these commands work on the primary card only.  
Consult with participant – consultation works only with the “full  
chairperson control” configuration option. If limited control is  
selected, these commands work on the primary card only.  
Play name – this feature works with participants on both cards. The  
system plays the name on the chairperson’s desktop, not the  
telephone.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Browser user interface 105  
Release chairperson control  
The Meeting Control window contains a Release button to release  
chairperson control. This button releases both TUI and BUI control.  
When the Release button is pressed, the voice prompt “you are a  
regular conferee” is played. Clicking the button allows someone else to  
acquire chairperson control and enter the BUI control window of the  
meeting.  
Participant list volume control  
The chairperson can change the hearing and speaking volume for each  
participant by selecting the Volume button for that participant. See  
Figure 50 for a depiction.  
Figure 50  
Participant Volume Control Panel  
The two scales in the middle of this window show the current  
increase/decrease level for hear and talk directions. The middle of the  
scale is zero, which signifies no volume change. Click on one of the  
arrows to increase or decrease the volume. The colored rectangle in  
the scale advances one step for each arrow click.  
Click on the Reset Volume of participant button to restore the initial  
volume level of the participant. Click on the Apply to all button to set  
this modified setting to all participants. The initial volume level is  
determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.  
Administration BUI  
Introduction  
This section applies to administrators only. The main administration  
window is the ICB Dashboard, which appears directly after an  
administrator logs in. The dashboard provides access to the relevant  
window to perform the required task (see Figure 51 on page 106).  
A special function is the Installation Wizard, which guides an  
administrator through a quick and easy process for configuring a new  
card. For more information about the Install Wizard, see “ICB  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
106 Browser user interface  
Figure 51  
Administration BUI navigation flowchart  
ICB Home Page  
ICB Home Page  
LOGIN  
(Administrator login)  
Login dialog box  
OK  
Return to  
ICB Dashboard  
Dashboard  
CLI  
window  
CLI button  
Install Wizard  
Links  
Links  
Settings  
Call-Out Groups  
Basic settings  
Access numbers  
Define first user  
Dual-card meetings  
General  
Groups List  
Confirmation E-mail  
Greetings  
New Call-Out Group  
Company Images  
Default Conference  
Volume Level  
Users  
Users List  
New User  
Search  
Upgrades  
Number of Ports  
Permanent Conferences  
Permanent Conf. List  
Firmware Version  
New Permanent Conf.  
Backup  
Scheduled Backup  
Reports  
Report  
Manual Backup  
Backup History Log  
Last Backup Details  
Billing Schedule  
G100266  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Browser user interface 107  
ICB Dashboard  
The ICB organizes the Dashboard as an internet portal. The  
Dashboard groups links by subject (see Figure 52).  
Figure 52  
Administration BUI ICB Dashboard window  
The title frame on top, which is present for all administration windows,  
contains the following buttons:  
Dashboard – click here to return to the dashboard, while discarding  
the input in the current window.  
CLI – opens an additional window for input and output of CLI  
commands (from more information, see “CLI command summary”  
From the Dashboard, the “Change Password” link opens the Change  
Password window shown in “Login password change” on page 83.  
Access the Change Password window from the Dashboard to change  
the current administrator password.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
108 Browser user interface  
The ICB Dashboard has the following sections:  
Settings  
This subject groups several parameters and definitions. Links to  
sub-subjects appear on the Dashboard.  
General Settings window  
Figure 53 shows the General Settings window.  
Figure 53  
ICB Dashboard – General Settings window  
Table 23 on page 109 describes the options available in the General  
Settings window.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Browser user interface 109  
Table 23  
General Settings window fields  
Field  
Description  
Administration  
E-mail  
Enter the E-mail address to which the ICB sends administration material,  
including backup files.  
Billing option  
Select a billing option for this card from the pull-down menu. The options are as  
follows:  
No billing – The ICB does not issue a billing report.  
Billing reports – The ICB issues a billing report (see “Billing Report” on  
Billing reports & CDR – The ICB issues a billing report and a CDR record  
Note: The Billing reports & CDR record option is not available on the Meridian SL-100.  
Card ID (4 digits)  
Enter the card ID that the system uses for billing purposes.  
Range: A four-digit decimal.  
Ports overbooking Enter the number of ports the Overbooking feature adds. The available values  
are shown in the form of 32 + N, where 32 is the physical capacity and N is the  
addition for overbooking.  
Range: From 32 + 0 (no overbooking) to 32 + 8 for cards with 32 ports. In cards  
with less than 32 ports, the maximum N is the proportional fraction of 8 (for  
example, 16 + 4 for a card with 16 ports).  
Default: N = 0 (no overbooking).  
Reserve port for  
TUI  
Click in the box to dedicate one of the card’s ports for TUI access, which is not  
available for meetings. When this box is not checked, the system does not  
reserve a port for the TUI; when all ports on the ICB are busy the TUI is  
inaccessible.  
Name recording  
length  
Enter the duration, in seconds, of the spoken name in the name-entry option.  
When the system prompts the callers for their name, recording after the beep  
takes place for the specified duration.  
Range: 2-10 seconds.  
Default: 2 seconds.  
Conference  
auto-generated  
password length  
Enter the number of digits for the conference or chairperson password, when a  
user selects the password to be automatically generated by the ICB.  
Meeting closed  
second warning  
message  
Click the box to have hear the second warning message 2 minutes before ending  
the meeting.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
110 Browser user interface  
Table 23  
General Settings window fields (Continued)  
Field  
Description  
Week working  
days  
Select the range of working days from the pull-down menu. The ICB uses this  
information when creating recurrent conferences with the option “Workday”.  
Range: Any day of the week.  
Default: Monday to Friday.  
Outdated  
From the pull-down menu, select the number of days these files are kept before  
the system deletes them (also referred to as the “aging factor”). For scheduling  
data, this field applies to conferences that have already taken place. The system  
keeps future conferences as long as required.  
Conferences &  
Reports: remove  
after  
Default conference  
Figure 56 shows the window in which an administrator can set as the  
default conference settings.  
Figure 54  
ICB Dashboard – Default Conference Settings  
Click here to discard  
input and re-display  
existing values.  
Click here to submit  
the changes and return  
to the dashboard.  
Table 26 describes the options available in the Default Conference  
Settings window.  
Table 24  
Default Conference Settings fields  
Field  
Description  
User Password  
Set the default setting for User Password as No password or Automatically  
assigned password. The factory default setting is automatically assigned  
password.  
Chairperson  
Password  
Set the default setting for Chairperson Password as No password or  
Automatically assigned password. The factory default setting is automatically  
assigned password.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Browser user interface 111  
Table 24  
Default Conference Settings fields (Continued)  
Field  
Description  
Indication for entry Set the default setting for Indication for entry and exit as: Play name on entry and  
and exit  
name on exit, Play name on entry and tone on exit, Play tone on entry and tone  
on exit, or Silence. The factory default setting is play name on entry and play  
name on exit.  
Language  
Set the default setting for language. The factory default setting is North American  
English.  
Add ports if  
needed  
Check this box if the administrator wants the default setting to be add ports if  
needed. The factory default setting is not checked.  
Keep one port for  
Chairperson  
Check this box if the administrator wants the default setting to keep one port for  
the Chairperson. The factory default setting is checked.  
Volume Level  
Figure 56 shows the window in which an administrator can customize  
the volume level settings.  
Figure 55  
ICB Dashboard – Volume Level Settings  
Click here to discard  
input and re-display  
existing values.  
Click here to submit  
the changes and return  
to the dashboard.  
Table 26 describes the options available in the Volume Level Settings  
window.  
Table 25  
Volume Level Settings fields  
Field  
Description  
Voice Prompt:  
Playing  
Enter the default setting for the volume level of the voice prompt when playing.  
Recording:  
Enter the default setting for the volume level of when recording.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
112 Browser user interface  
Table 25  
Volume Level Settings fields (Continued)  
Field  
Description  
Speak:  
Enter the default setting for the speaking volume level of the conferee in an audio  
conference.  
Listen:  
Enter the default setting for the listening volume level of the conferee in an audio  
conference.  
E-mail template  
Figure 56 shows the window in which an administrator can customize  
the scheduling confirmation E-mail.  
Figure 56  
ICB Dashboard – Confirmation E-mail Settings  
Click here to submit  
the changes and return  
to the dashboard.  
Click here to open a window that  
shows how the E-mail looks when  
the data in the window is applied.  
Click here to discard  
input and re-display  
existing values.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Browser user interface 113  
The window shows the layout of the E-mail. The customizable text fields  
are editable. Additional parameters to define appear at the bottom of  
the window.  
Table 26 describes the options available in the Confirmation E-mail  
Settings window.  
Table 26  
Confirmation E-mail Settings fields  
Field  
Description  
From  
The sender’s address defined in the first step of the Install Wizard. This field is  
view only.  
CC:  
Enter the E-mail address, or list of addresses, which will receive a carbon copy  
(CC) of all confirmation E-mails that the ICB sends. Separate the addresses by  
a space.  
BCC:  
Enter the E-mail address, or list of addresses, which will receive a blank carbon  
copy (BCC) of all confirmation E-mails that the ICB sends. The system hides  
these addresses; they do not appear on the E-mails.  
Opening text  
Enter the header that appears before the fixed part of the E-mail (that is, the  
meeting details).  
Example: company name or slogan.  
Instructions for  
Participants  
Enter the information that appears after the meeting details.  
Example: dialing instructions and list of TUI commands.  
Instructions for  
Chairperson  
Enter information for the chairperson in this field.  
Example: chairperson TUI commands and other tips for the chairperson.  
Closing text  
Time format  
Enter the information that appears as a footer at the bottom of the E-mail body.  
From the pull-down menu, select the time format that the E-mail uses (that is,  
24-hour or AM/PM).  
Time Zone  
DID Prefix  
Enter the time zone of the ICB in free text. The ICB does not check the syntax.  
Example: GMT-5 (EST), Eastern Standard Time, or New York (GMT-5).  
Enter the DID prefix that callers use to access the card from the public network.  
Enter this value as free text.  
Example: (613) 961.  
ESN Prefix  
Enter the prefix that callers use when accessing the card by Electronic Switched  
Network (ESN).  
Example: 846.  
Toll Free Access  
Enter the toll free access number that callers use to access the card.  
Example: (800) 961.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
114 Browser user interface  
Customize greetings  
Figure 57 shows the window used to customize the following greetings:  
• Brandline greeting  
• Per-conference user’s greeting  
Figure 57  
ICB Dashboard – Greeting Settings window  
Click here to display  
the required .WAV  
file specifications.  
Click here to discard input and  
re-display existing values.  
Note: This button does not affect  
the actions of the Upload and Delete  
buttons.  
Click here to submit the changes and return  
to the Dashboard.  
Note: This button does not affect  
the actions of the Upload and Delete buttons.  
The table in this window lists the available languages. For each  
language, the factory-made greetings can be replaced with a  
customized greeting in the form of a .WAV file.  
Brandline greeting  
Follow the steps in Procedure 17 on page 115 to replace the brandline  
greeting for a given language.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Browser user interface 115  
Procedure 17  
Replace the brandline greeting  
1
Upload the .WAV file from your computer to the ICB using your computer’s  
operating system.  
a
Click on the Browse button.  
A Choose dialog box opens on your computer.  
b
Scroll through the dialog box to select the location of the .WAV file and  
click on the Open button.  
The system closes this dialog box and the selected file’s name appears  
in the read-only Local file: text box.  
c
Click on the Upload button.  
The ICB loads the file into the card and adds the file name to the  
combo-box next to the selected language.  
Note: The upload action is immediate. There is no need to submit and  
save it. It cannot be cancelled by clicking on the Reset button.  
2
3
4
Click on the radio button next to the language in the table to select the  
language.  
Select the desired .WAV file you uploaded in the File column for that  
language.  
Click on the Submit button to save the change.  
This procedure is now complete  
There are two additional action buttons as follows:  
Play – Click on this button to play the selected greeting. The system  
plays the file of the selected language on your computer.  
Delete – Click on this button to delete the selected greeting from the  
card. The system removes the file’s name from the combo-box.  
Before deleting the file, the BUI opens a dialog box that asks: “Are  
you sure you want to delete greeting file xxxx.WAV?”  
After the system deletes the file, it removes the file from the  
combo-box that contained it. The selection returns to the “factory  
default” greeting.  
Note: The delete action is immediate. There is no need to submit  
and save it. It cannot be cancelled by clicking on the Reset button.  
Conference-specific greeting  
Use these fields in the Greeting Settings window to enable or disable  
the Conference-specific Greeting feature. Click on the Available radio  
button to enable the conference-specific greeting. When selected, the  
administrator can define the maximum length of the greeting. The range  
is from two to 10 seconds; the default is five seconds.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
116 Browser user interface  
Company images upload  
Figure 58 shows the window that an administrator can use to customize  
the ICB home page image and the customer’s logo on the title frame.  
Images must be in GIF format.  
Figure 58  
ICB Dashboard – Company Images window  
Title Frame Image  
“No image” is the default. Follow the steps in Procedure 18 to use a  
customized image.  
Procedure 18  
Use a customized image  
1
2
Click on the Browse button.  
A choose local file dialog box provided by your computer’s operating system  
opens. This window allows an administrator to select a file in their computer.  
Navigate to the folder that contains the file to upload, select the file and click  
on the Open button.  
The system closes the dialog box and the selected file’s name appears in the  
read-only Local file: text box.  
3
Click on the Upload button.  
The system uploads the file into the ICB card and the file name appears in  
the box adjacent to the Image name: radio button.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Browser user interface 117  
4
To activate the image, click on the Submit button.  
The new image becomes the customer logo and the system discards the  
previous image.  
Note: If the Reset button is clicked, instead of the Submit button, the  
system discards the image.  
This procedure is now complete  
The maximum image size is 124 pixels wide by 40 pixels high. The  
system does not allows a larger image, as this distorts the frame. If a  
customer image is not supplied, the customer’s logo on the home page  
remains an empty rectangle.  
Note: The ICB does not check the image size; the administrator is  
responsible for verifying the correct size.  
Login Page Image  
Upload this image in the same way as in Procedure 18. The image  
should fit reasonably in a browser window. For example, the ICB default  
image is 690 pixels wide by 420 pixels high. The system accepts a  
smaller image.  
The additional placement parameter allows the image to be placed on  
the login window as follows:  
Top left– the system places the image on the top-left corner of the  
window and leaves the background empty (that is, the browser’s  
background color). This is the default.  
Tiled – the system duplicates the image as many times as needed  
to cover the window’s space.  
Upgrades  
See “Upgrade procedures” on page 215 for more information about  
how to use the Dashboard to perform card and firmware upgrades.  
Users  
This section enables an administrator to go directly to the following  
windows:  
• Users List  
• New User  
• Search  
Users List  
Figure 59 on page 118 shows the User List window which is the main  
window for users administration.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
118 Browser user interface  
Figure 59  
ICB Dashboard – User List window  
Click on this button to reset a selected user’s  
password back to the initial password (that is,  
six zeros - 000000). Use this button if users forget  
their password.  
Click on this button to delete selected users.  
Before deleting, the system displays the following  
dialog box, for example: “Are you sure you want to  
delete these four users?”  
The buttons on top of the window are for additional administrator  
actions; the sections that follow describe these actions.  
The window displays a list of users in the form of a table that the  
systems sorts alphabetically by name. The table shows 10 users, with  
each user in a separate row. Click on the “Next 10” or “Previous 10”  
links to view additional users. Find a specific user by clicking on the  
Search for Users button (see “Search for a user” on page 121).  
Table 27 describes the columns in the Users List table.  
Table 27  
User List table columns  
Column  
Description  
User name  
Free text up to 20 characters. The BUI treats the whole name as one string; there  
is no distinction of first and last name.  
The name is a link. Click on the name to open the Edit User window for this user.  
The user type: user; super-user, executive user, or administrator.  
User type  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Browser user interface 119  
Table 27  
User List table columns (Continued)  
Column  
Description  
User Access  
User ID  
The access for the user: BUI, Outlook, or BUI and Outlook.  
The login ID for the BUI, up to 10 characters.  
The TUI Login ID, up to 10 digits.  
Telephony ID  
Billing  
An account number for the user, which the system uses for billing purposes. This  
number appears in billing reports. The field can be empty, if the billing feature is  
not being used.  
E-mail  
The user’s E-mail address for receiving scheduling confirmation by E-mail. It can  
be empty, in which case the user does not receive scheduling confirmation  
E-mails.  
Checkboxes  
Click on a checkbox to select the corresponding user. The buttons below the  
table perform actions on selected users.  
Edit a user  
When an administrator clicks on a name in the Users List window, the  
Edit User Details window opens (see Figure 60 on page 120). Use the  
Edit User Details window to modify the properties of an existing user.  
The window shows all the properties of the selected user. The  
properties in this window can be modified. The fields are the same as  
those in Table 27.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
120 Browser user interface  
Figure 60  
ICB Dashboard – Users > Edit User Details window  
Discard input and return  
to User List window.  
Submit changes to save new user definitions  
and return to Users List window.  
Discard input and re-display  
existing values.  
Add new user  
Click on the New User button in the User List window to access the  
New User window. Use the New User window to add new users (see  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Browser user interface 121  
Figure 61  
ICB Dashboard – Users > New User window  
Submit changes to save new user definitions  
and return to Users List window.  
Discard input and return  
to User List window.  
Submit this window to save  
the new user and re-display  
an empty form. Use this button  
to add several users consecutively.  
Note: The password for a new user is initially 000000 (that is, six  
zeros). Nortel Networks recommends that the user change it during  
the first login session.  
Search for a user  
When the Search for User button in the Users List window is clicked,  
the Search for a User window opens. Use the Search for a User window  
to view a subset of users depending on the criteria entered (see Figure  
62).  
Figure 62  
ICB Dashboard – Users > Search for a User window  
Click on this link to return  
to the Users List window.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
122 Browser user interface  
Click on one of the Search by: radio buttons to specify the field to  
search.The following options are available:  
• Name (the system treats the whole name as one string and makes  
no distinction between first and last name)  
• User Type  
• User ID  
The system searches the string depending on the entry in the Find  
letters: field. All values that begin with this string match the criterion.  
The search is not case-sensitive. In the above example, the field to  
search is by name and the letters to find are “a”. The system displays  
all names that begin with “a” in a table similar to that in the User List  
table (see Table 27 on page 118).  
Import users  
Use the Import User button in the User List window to import the user  
list from the mate ICB card in a dual-card pair. This button only appears  
in a primary or secondary ICB card; it does not appear in stand-alone  
ICB configurations. Use this window to define the same users on both  
cards, instead of re-entering all user data a second time. The user list  
can be imported after entering it on the first card.  
Before importing, the Dual Meeting parameters must be defined (see  
“Step 4 – Dual Card Meetings” on page 77). If the second card’s IP  
address is not configured, an error message appears.  
After clicking on the Import User button, the confirmation dialog box in  
Figure 63 appears.  
Figure 63  
ICB Dashboard – Import Users Confirmation box  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Browser user interface 123  
Table 28 describes the information that this message displays.  
Table 28  
Import Users Confirmation box text  
Text line  
Description  
First  
Indicates from which card the users will be imported. If the card is the primary  
card it shows the IP address of the secondary card and vice versa.  
Second  
Third  
Shows how many users are already defined in this card.  
Shows how many users can be imported. An ICB card can have up to 500 users.  
When the number of users reaches 500, the system terminates the import  
process.  
Fourth  
Fifth  
Informs the administrator that existing users will not be changed (that is, the  
system does not import a user ID if an identical user ID already exists on the  
card).  
Asks for confirmation, or cancellation, of the import.  
Click on the OK button to start the import process. When the system  
completes the import, it updates the User List window to include  
imported users. At this point, the user can be deleted or modified as per  
normal operation.  
Call-out Groups  
This section enables an administrator to go directly the following  
windows:  
• Call-Out Group List  
• Add New Call-out Group  
Call-Out Group List  
Figure 64 on page 124 shows the Call-Out Group List window which is  
the main window for group list administration.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
124 Browser user interface  
Figure 64  
ICB Dashboard – Call-Out Group List window  
The window displays a list of groups in the form of a table, sorted by  
group number. The table is read-only. Table 29 describes the  
information that appears in the table’s columns.  
Table 29  
Call-Out Group List table columns  
Column  
Description  
Group #  
The number that identifies the group. The chairperson uses this number when  
calling a group from the TUI.  
Range: 1 to 64  
Group Name  
Free text, up to 20 characters, that describes this group.  
The name displayed is a link. Click on the name to open the Group Details  
window for this group.  
Members  
Shows the number of members in the group.  
Checkboxes  
Click in a checkbox to select the group. The Delete button at the bottom of the  
window can then be used to delete the group. Before deleting the group, the  
system displays the following dialog box, for example: “Are you sure you want to  
delete these three groups?”  
Click on the New Call-Out Group button to open a window for adding  
new groups (see page Figure 69 on page 130).  
Group details  
Click on the group’s name in the table in the Call-Out Group List window  
to open the Call-Out Groups Details window (see Figure 65 on page  
125). Use the Call-Out Groups Details window to view and modify an  
existing group.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Browser user interface 125  
Figure 65  
ICB Dashboard – Call-Out Groups > Details window  
The window shows the members and properties of the selected group.  
The members appear in a table, with one member per row. Click on the  
“Next 10” or “Previous 10” link to view additional group members. Table  
30 describes the columns in the Group Members table.  
Table 30  
Group Members table columns  
Column  
Description  
Number  
The telephone number of this member. The system dials this number when a  
chairperson calls this group. Maximum number length is 31 digits.  
The number displayed is also a link. Click on the number to open the Edit  
Member window in which the group member can be edited.  
Wait for  
Confirmation  
Activate, or de-activate, the answer confirmation for this member as follows:  
Activated (checkmark) – The default value for new members. When the  
system calls this number due to group call-out activation, the ICB waits for a  
“human” answer confirmation. The system prompts the called party to enter  
an asterisk (*) from their DTMF keypad. If the system does not receive this  
confirmation, the ICB retries the call as defined in the group’s properties. The  
system does not connect the called party to the conference, until it receives  
the answer confirmation.  
Not activated (X) – The ICB does not wait for confirmation. Upon call  
origination, the system connects the call to the conference.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
126 Browser user interface  
Table 30  
Group Members table columns (Continued)  
Column  
Description  
Checkboxes  
Click on a check box to select a member of the group. The Delete button at the  
bottom of the window can then be used to delete the group member. Before  
deleting the group, the system displays the following dialog box, for example:  
“Are you sure you want to delete these five members?”  
Use the Add Members button at the top of the Group Members table  
to add a member to the group (see Figure 66 on page 127).  
The right side of the window displays the group’s properties for  
outcalling retries. These settings apply only to members with the option  
“Wait for Confirmation” activated. Table 31 describes these parameters  
which are view only. Click on the Modify button to open a window in  
which these settings can be changed (see Figure 68 on page 129).  
Table 31  
Group Settings Retry parameters  
Field  
Description  
Wait time for  
answer  
The number of seconds to wait for the called party to answer when calling  
numbers in this group.Time is measured from call origination, so it includes the  
dialing and ringing stages. An answer here, refers to the DTMF * keypad press.  
Range: 15-90 seconds.  
Default: 30 seconds.  
Number of call  
attempts  
The number of times to try each number in case of failure. Value 1 means only  
1 attempt, no retries.  
Range: 1-3.  
Default: 1.  
Time interval  
between attempts  
The number of seconds the system waits, before retrying the same number.  
Range: 5-30 seconds.  
Default: 10.  
Add Members – Click on the Add Members button in the Call-Out  
Groups Details window to open the Add Members window. Use the Add  
Members window to add one or more members to an existing group  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Browser user interface 127  
Figure 66  
ICB Dashboard – Call-Out Groups > Details > Add Members window  
Submit changes to save new user  
definition and return to Group Details the new member and re-display  
Submit this window to save  
Discard input and return  
to Group Details window.  
window.  
an empty form. Use this button  
to add several members consecutively.  
Add members by entering the phone number directly in the table. The  
default “Wait for Confirmation” option setting is active (that is, checked  
in the corresponding checkbox). Uncheck the checkbox if you need to  
change the default setting. The table contains 10 rows.  
Edit Member – Click on a specific number in the Call-Out Groups  
Details window to open the Edit Members window. Use the Edit  
Members window to modify a member’s number or confirmation option  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
128 Browser user interface  
Figure 67  
ICB Dashboard – Call-Out Groups > Details > Edit Members window  
Discard input and return  
to Group Details window.  
Submit input to save the change  
and return to Group Details window.  
Edit the number directly in the text box. Change the “Wait for  
Confirmation” option by clicking in the in Wait for Confirmation box.  
Edit Group Properties – Click on the Modify button in the Call-Out  
Groups Details window (below the Group Settings table) to open the  
Modify Group Settings window. Use the Modify Group Settings window  
to modify the call-out retry parameters of the group (see Figure 68 on  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Browser user interface 129  
Figure 68  
ICB Dashboard – Call-Out Groups > Details > Modify Group Settings window  
Discard input and return  
to Call-Out Group Details  
window.  
Submit changes to save the change  
and return to Call-Out Group  
Details window.  
The Group number is view only. The name and parameters can be  
modified as described in Table 31 on page 126.  
Add a New Group  
Click on the New Call-Out Group button in the Call-Out Group List  
window to open the <New Group> Details window. Use the <New  
Group> Details window to add a new call-out group. Use this window to  
fill in the new group’s members and set the retry parameters (see  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
130 Browser user interface  
Figure 69  
ICB Dashboard – Call-Out Groups > <New Group> Details window  
Discard input and return  
to Call-Out Group List window.  
Submit this window to save  
the new group and re-display  
an empty form. Use this button  
to add several members consecutively.  
Submit changes to save the new group  
and return to Call-Out Group List window.  
This window has the same layout as the Call-Out Group Details window  
(see Figure 65 on page 125), except here all fields are editable. The  
Group number pull-down menu shows only available numbers (that is,  
numbers not used by other groups).  
Permanent Conferences  
Under this subject an administrator can access the Permanent  
Conferences List window or go directly to the New Permanent  
Conference window.  
Permanent Conferences List  
Figure 70 on page 131 shows the Permanent Conferences List window.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Browser user interface 131  
Figure 70  
ICB Dashboard – Permanent Conferences List window  
The Conference List table shows a list of permanent conferences in the  
card. This table is similar to the regular conference table (see Figure 36  
on page 87), except that the time-related fields (that is, start and  
duration) do not exist. Start and duration are irrelevant in permanent  
conferences. All other fields are the same.  
Note: Because a permanent conference is always active, the control  
icon exists for all conferences in the table.  
New/Edit Permanent Conference  
Use the Permanent Conferences List window to perform the following:  
• Define a new permanent conference. Click on the New Permanent  
Conference button to open the New Permanent Conference  
window.  
• Edit an existing conference. Click on the edit icon in the conference  
row of the Conference List table to open the Edit Permanent  
Conference window.  
Note: These two windows are identical, except during the edit  
operation the window’s title shows “Edit Permanent Conference”.  
Figure 71 on page 132 shows the New/Edit Permanent Conference  
window.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
132 Browser user interface  
Figure 71  
ICB Dashboard – New/Edit Permanent Conference window  
Discard input and return  
to the Permanent Conference  
window.  
Discard input and re-display  
default values.  
Submit the request for execution.  
The system responds with either  
a Confirmation window or an Error  
message.  
This window is similar to the regular conference scheduling window  
(see “Scheduling window” on page 89), except that all time-related  
fields are not applicable. The start time and duration do not appear in  
this window. In addition, there is no dual-card meeting link, because a  
permanent conference cannot be a dual-card meeting.  
The option “add port if needed” is always no for permanent  
conferences, so it does not appear in this window.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Browser user interface 133  
Unlike the regular scheduling window that has pop-up sections, all  
fields and options appear on the basic window.  
Table 32  
Permanent Conference New/Edit parameters  
Field  
Description  
General section  
Subject  
Enter text that describes the purpose of the conference.  
Range: Enter up to 20 characters, or leave this field empty.  
Default: Empty.  
Number of  
participants  
Enter the number of ports to reserve for this conference, including the  
chairperson ports. The application makes sure that the total number of reserved  
ports for this time period does not exceed system capacity. The system performs  
validation after submission.  
Range: 3 to 32.  
Default: 4  
Owner ID  
Enter the user ID that will appear for this conference in billing reports and logs.  
Any user in the card can be assigned as the owner. However, since this is a  
permanent conference, the owner cannot modify or delete the conference,  
unless they are an administrator. Thus, this field is only for billing and logging  
reference.  
Default: The administrator that defines the conference.  
Chairperson  
Enter the name of the chairperson for user’s reference.  
Range: Text up to 20 characters.  
Default: Empty.  
Access Numbers section  
DN pair usage  
option  
The administrator must select a DN pair from the list. The list shows pairs of  
numbers in the format: [conference (chairperson)]. The system checks the  
availability of the number when the form is submitted for execution. If the  
number is not available, the operation fails.  
Password section  
User Password  
Enter an optional password for the conference. If configured, callers must enter  
this password to join the conference. Available options are as follows:  
None – no password.  
Automatically assigned – The system automatically generates the  
password. The administrator sets the password length from 4 to 8 digits.  
Define a password – The user defines the password. The range is 4 to 8  
digits. The window shows the password as it is entered. The system does  
not check the password for uniqueness. Different conferences can use the  
same password.  
Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
134 Browser user interface  
Table 32  
Permanent Conference New/Edit parameters (Continued)  
Field  
Description  
Chairperson  
Password  
Enter a password for chairperson authentication. This field has the same options  
as the user password.  
Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.  
General Options section  
Emergency  
conference  
Click in this box to define an emergency conference with an associated call  
group. The system automatically calls the specified group’s members from the  
conference when the chairperson dials the conference. The selection box lists  
existing groups in the card.  
This type of conference is for invoking emergency personnel (for example,  
firemen).  
Indication for entry Define how the system announces when people enter or exit a conference. The  
and exit  
following options are available from the pull-down menu:  
Play name on entry and name on exit (the default).  
Play name on entry and tone on exit.  
Play tone on entry and tone on exit.  
Silence (no indication for entry or exit).  
Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference setting.  
Language  
Select the language the system uses for voice prompts during the conference.  
The pull-down menu offers the set of languages available in the system. The  
default is the ICB card’s default language.  
When using single-number access, the preferred language takes affect after the  
caller enters the conference ID and password. Before that the system uses the  
default language.  
Keep one port for  
chairperson  
Click on this box to reserve a port for the chairperson. When all the ports are  
occupied but one, and the chairperson has not yet dialed in, the remaining port  
is not available for a participant. If this box is not checked, the system uses the  
ports on a first-come first-serve basis. In this case, if all the ports are taken up  
by participants, the system will not allow the chairperson to enter the conference.  
Default: the option is checked (on).  
Backup  
For more information about how to use the ICB Dashboard to backup  
Reports  
For more information about how to use the ICB Dashboard to generate  
and view reports, see “Reports” on page 195.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
135  
Telephone user interface  
Purpose  
This chapter describes how to use the telephone user interface (TUI)  
to:  
• invoke commands during an active conference  
• schedule conferences and record greetings  
The chapter contains the following sections:  
“Overview” on page 135 – introduces the telephone user  
interface.  
provides procedures for using TUI features from a dual tone  
multi-frequency (DTMF) telephone while in an active conference.  
“TUI services” on page 146 – describes TUI services available  
when there is no active conference, such as scheduling.  
Overview  
Active conference  
The ICB provides a DTMF, menu-driven telephone user interface. The  
TUI enables the chairperson, and conferees, to invoke commands from  
their telephone during an active conference, such as mute or unmute.  
This functionality is provided during a meeting with no additional  
provisioning required.  
Scheduling and recording features  
To access the TUI for scheduling and recording, dial the TUI DN. The  
system prompts the user to enter their TUI ID and password.The  
system responds depending on the user ID as identified by the TUI ID  
as follows:  
• Regular user – the TUI responds with a voice menu with the  
following two items:  
— schedule a conference  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
136 Telephone user interface  
— record a conference-specific greeting  
Note: If the second feature is disabled by the administrator  
(see Figure 57 on page 114), the system skips this item and  
the user directly enters the scheduling menu.  
• Administrator – An administrator does not schedule a conference.  
The TUI responds with a voice menu with the following two items:  
— record a conference-specific greeting  
— record a system brandline greeting  
Note: If the first feature is disabled by the administrator (see  
Figure 57 on page 114), the system skips this item and the  
administrator directly enters the brandline greeting menu.  
Scheduling and recording greetings requires a system TUI DN and TUI  
ID for each user. For more information about defining a new DN, see  
The BUI must be used to define a TUI user ID for each user (see “Users  
If a second user dials the TUI DN when the TUI is in use, the ICB plays  
a voice message announcing that the port is in use.  
TUI operation during an active conference  
This section describes how the TUI can be used while in an active  
conference.  
Chairperson features  
Dial-out  
The chairperson can dial out and call a new party outside of the  
conference. They can talk with the party or bring the party into the  
conference. As a chairperson, dial *0<DN># (# is a digit entered by the  
chairperson after the DN) to dial a party outside the conference or *0 to  
access the operator.  
Bring the party into the conference by dialing *2 or disconnect the call  
by dialing *3. If the chairperson dials the wrong number, dial *3 and  
re-dial. To redial the last number dialed, dial *#.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Telephone user interface 137  
The ICB card selects the port for dialing out. The port is available if the  
number of ports reserved for the conference is greater than the number  
of conferees that have joined the conference. When all reserved ports  
are taken, the port can be available, if there are un-reserved ports on  
the ICB card and the port expansion feature is enabled for that  
conference. If all reserved ports are taken and there are no  
unscheduled ports available, the system cannot complete the call.  
Note: When the chairperson dials out to another ICB conference,  
two ports are seized, the dial-out port of the local ICB and the dial-in  
port of the remote ICB. This connection can be terminated only if the  
chairperson drops the dial-out port of the local ICB. However,  
normally the dial-out call is a telephone, so the system only seizes  
one port.  
Dial-out Authorization  
The Dial-out Authorization feature enables the chairperson to connect  
external parties to the conference when the desired destination number  
is restricted.  
This feature uses the Meridian Authorization feature. As such, the  
chairperson must be aware of outdialing restrictions and know the  
authorization access code (Flexible Feature Code – FFC or Special  
Prefix – SPRE on the CS 1000; Auth Access # on the CS 2100/Meridian  
SL-100).  
The chairperson must enter the whole string of authorization numbers  
as the example in Figure 72 on page 138 shows. There are no  
confirmation tones or dial tone in the middle of dialing.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
138 Telephone user interface  
Figure 72  
Dial-out Authorization dialing example  
Auth FCC (Meridian 1)  
Auth Access # (Meridian SL-100)  
* 0 8 8 8 1 2 3 4 9 0 9 7 2 8 9 1 3 4 5 1 2 #  
Outdial  
Command  
User's  
Authcode  
Dial DN  
ended by #  
* 0 7 7 7 6 1 2 3 4 9 0 9 7 2 8 9 1 3 4 5 1 2 #  
SPRE + 6  
(Meridian 1 only)  
Legend  
Authorization Feature FCC/Access # = 888  
Special Prefix (SPRE) = 777  
User's authorization code = 1234  
Trunk access code = 9  
Desired DN = 0-972-8-9134512  
G100081  
Note: In BUI, define the same sequence as above, except do not  
enter the command code * 0.  
If using this feature and Group Call, make sure that the authorization  
access code precedes the restricted DNs in the group call list.  
All ports mute/unmute toggle  
A chairperson can place all conference participants, except the  
chairperson, on mute by dialing *10. While on mute, the participants  
can listen to the conference. To unmute the participants, the  
chairperson dials *10 again. Because there is one command for mute  
and unmute, the system announces to the chairperson one of two  
possible voice messages: “All participants have been muted” or “All  
participants have been unmuted.Only the chairperson hears the  
mute/unmute announcement.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Telephone user interface 139  
Group call-out  
Each ICB card supports up to 64 group call-out lists, each with up to 61  
telephone numbers. Each telephone number can be up to 31 digits in  
length.  
The administrator defines group call-out lists through the BUI (see  
“Call-out Groups” on page 123). The system saves the information on  
the ICB PCMCIA disk.  
The administrator must define the following options for each group list:  
• number of dial-out retries allowed (range: 1-3, default: 1)  
• time between each dial-out retry (range: 15-90 seconds, default: 30)  
The chairperson on an active conference can call all members of a  
group call-out list by dialing the following: *2 <group list number> #. The  
ICB dials out to all the telephone numbers in the requested group  
call-out list simultaneously. If there are more than 31 numbers on the  
group call-out list, the system requires two ICB cards.  
When the system uses two ICB cards in a group call-out, the primary  
card divides the group call-out list into two groups. The primary card  
dials one group of numbers and sends the second group to the  
secondary card over the TCP/IP LAN. The secondary card then dials  
the second group of numbers. The system dials out both groups of  
numbers simultaneously.  
The ICB card dials out by allocating a free port and originating the call  
on it. The system does not connect the port to the meeting, until the call  
successfully completes. After the ICB card originates the call, it plays a  
specific prompt and keeps repeating the prompt for a number of  
seconds (determined by the administrator). The default configuration  
forces the called party to respond by dialing a star * during this interval.  
When the ICB card detects the correct response, it connects the call to  
the meeting. If the ICB card does not detect the correct response within  
the defined time and the defined number of retries, the ICB card  
disconnects the call.  
Note: The administrator can configure the call to complete without  
requiring the called party to enter a star *. This option enables the  
connection to paging systems and auto-attendants.  
The system limits group call-outs to the number of available ports on a  
conference. When a chairperson uses a list containing 61 numbers,  
and the meeting has 20 free ports, the system dials only the first 20  
telephone numbers.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
140 Telephone user interface  
Group Call-out Smart Retry – When the chairperson makes a group  
call-out to the same group for the second time, the system repeats the  
call-out only to numbers that are not connected in the conference. The  
second call-out includes calls to the following:  
• numbers not successfully connected in the previous group call-out  
• numbers that were connected, but then disconnected  
The Group Call-out Smart Retry feature minimizes port usage during  
group calls.  
Lock or unlock the conference  
The chairperson can lock the conference to prevent any new conferees  
from joining by dialing *4. The chairperson can unlock the conference  
allowing new conferees to join by dialing *4 again. A caller trying to join  
a locked conference hears an announcement indicating that the  
conference is locked. The system then disconnects the call. The  
chairperson can dial-out and include a conferee when the conference  
is locked.  
Because there is one command for lock and unlock, the system  
announces to the chairperson one of two possible voice messages:  
“Meeting is locked” or “Meeting is unlocked.Only the chairperson that  
activates the command hears the lock/unlock announcement.  
Count conferees  
The chairperson can count the number of conferees that have joined a  
conference by dialing *69 (for announcing to the chairperson only), or  
*60 (for announcing to the whole conference). The ICB card issues a  
string of voice prompts, one for each conferee in the conference, that  
only the chairperson hears. If a new conferee joins the conference after  
the chairperson activates the command, the ICB card does not count  
that new conferee. If the system drops a conferee after the “count the  
conferees” or “play list” command, they are counted, but not named.  
When the chairperson dials *69/*60, the conferees hear a quiet click.  
Table 35 on page 143 lists the TUI subcommands available to the  
chairperson when counting conferees.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Telephone user interface 141  
Drop all conferees  
The chairperson can drop all conferees from the conference, except the  
chairperson, by dialing *90. The ICB does not issue an announcement  
to the conferees before disconnecting. After the system disconnects  
the conferees, the ICB card issues an announcement to the  
chairperson indicating that there are no conferees on the conference.  
The announcement is followed by 60 seconds of music. The  
conference remains active, so conferees can dial in again.  
Drop last dialed conferee  
The chairperson can drop the last conferee to join the conference  
through dial-out by dialing *91. The chairperson can drop the last  
conferee to dial in by dialing *92. These commands are not repeatable  
(that is, the chairperson can drop the last conferee to dial in, but not the  
second-to-last to dial in). If the chairperson is the last to dial into the  
conference, the ICB card cannot execute the *92 command.  
Conference duration expansion  
The chairperson can expand the duration of a conference by 15  
minutes by dialing *98. If the expansion is successful, the chairperson  
receives the voice message, “Your meeting duration has been  
expanded.If the duration expansion is not successful, because there  
are not enough resources, such as ports or DNs, the chairperson  
receives the message, “Your meeting duration has not been  
expanded.”  
The maximum conference duration, including all chairperson  
expansions, is 12 hours. The ICB card does not permit conference  
duration expansion to a conference scheduled to end within three  
minutes of the expansion request.  
Chairperson command summary  
Table 33 lists conference commands that the chairperson can execute  
on the telephone set while a conference is in progress.  
Table 33  
Chairperson commands  
Chairperson Command Description  
*0<DN>#  
Dial out to a DN (called party directory number, which is not a conference  
participant).  
*0#  
*2<GN>#  
*4  
Dial out to the assistant DN.  
Group call-out, where GN is the group number to call.  
Lock or unlock the conference.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
142 Telephone user interface  
Table 33  
Chairperson commands (Continued)  
Chairperson Command Description  
*7  
Volume control.  
*10  
*19  
*52  
*60  
*69  
All ports mute/unmute toggle.  
Self mute/unmute toggle.  
Release chairperson control.  
Count conferees and announces names to all participants.  
Count conferees and announces names to chairperson only. Activates a  
scrolling menu for the chairperson (see Table 35 on page 143).  
*81  
*82  
*83  
*90  
*91  
*92  
*98  
*99  
Voting: Yes, I agree.  
Voting: No, I disagree.  
Voting: I abstain.  
Drop all ports, except the chairperson’s port.  
Drop the last dialed-out port.  
Drop the last dialed-in port.  
Extend the conference by 15 minutes.  
Stop or start the initial conference music by the chairperson, which is  
possible only when the chairperson is the first person joining the  
conference. The first entry stops it, the second entry starts it.  
*
Abort current command.  
Redial last dialed DN.  
*#  
**  
Start or stop the help menu.  
Table 34 shows the commands available during a dial-out call (that is,  
after dialing *0<DN>#).  
Table 34  
Chairperson commands during dial-out call  
Chairperson dials ...  
In order to ...  
*2  
*3  
Return to the conference with dialed party.  
Return to the conference without dialed party.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Telephone user interface 143  
While the system is announcing the list of conference participants after  
the chairperson enters *69, the chairperson can execute the  
commands in Table 35.  
Table 35  
Chairperson commands during count command  
Chairperson dials ...  
In order to ...  
#
0
Stop and start the playlist.  
Consult privately with the conferee.  
Mute/unmute the conferee.  
1
2
Play the current conferee name greeting.  
Return to the conference.  
*3  
4
Select the previous conferee and play name.  
Select the next conferee and play name.  
Disconnect the current conferee.  
Start and stop the help menu.  
6
9
**  
Features available to all participants  
Self mute/unmute toggle  
All conference participants, including the chairperson, can put  
themselves on mute by dialing *19. While on mute, the participant can  
listen to the conference. To unmute, the participant dials *19 again.  
Because there is one command for mute and unmute, the system  
announces to the participant one of two possible voice messages:  
“Muted” or “Unmuted.Only the participant that activates the command  
hears the mute/unmute announcement. The mute/unmute command is  
available to those participants who dial into the conference and who the  
chairperson brings into the conference using the dial-out command.  
Stop or start music  
This feature stops or starts the initial conference music, which is  
possible only when the conferee is the first person joining the  
conference. Dial *99. The first entry stops it, the second entry starts it.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
144 Telephone user interface  
Adjust the audio volume of a conference  
Follow the steps in Procedure 19 to adjust the volume of a conference.  
Procedure 19  
Adjust the conference audio volume  
1
Dial *7 to adjust the volume. Figure 73 shows how the keypad operates this  
feature.  
Figure 73  
Volume control feature operation  
Decrease  
Increase  
Initial  
Level  
-9 dB -6 dB -3 dB  
0
+3 dB +6 dB +9 dB  
1
4
7
*
2
5
8
0
3
6
9
#
Legend  
1 = Decrease volume on speak direction  
3 = Increase volume on speak direction  
4 = Decrease volume on listen direction  
6 = Increase volume on listen direction  
2 = Restore initial volume level  
8 = Restore initial level of all participants  
(chairperson only)  
G100082  
When making a selection, the system applies the command, plays a  
confirmation tone, and returns the user to the conference.  
2
Each invocation of the command advances one step in the required direction.  
To advance more than one step, the whole sequence must be repeated. For  
example, to reach the maximum volume in the listen direction, dial:  
*76 *76 *76  
3
The menu can be interrupted, so the two-digit sequence can be entered  
without waiting for the menu.  
This procedure is now complete  
Help  
The chairperson can access a help menu by dialing **. The help menu  
is a voice recording of all chairperson command options. The  
chairperson can stop the help menu before it finishes by dialing **  
again.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Telephone user interface 145  
The help command is sensitive to where the chairperson is in the  
command structure. For example, if the conference is in the normal  
active state, the chairperson hears the main list of commands after  
dialing **. If the chairperson dials out to a person and then dials **, the  
chairperson hears the list of commands relevant to dialing out. If the  
chairperson dials *69 or *60 to count conferees, and then dials **, the  
chairperson hears the list of commands relevant to counting conferees.  
Conferees can dial ** to hear a list of command options available to  
conferees. Only the participant who dials ** hears the relevant list of  
commands.  
Conferee features  
Acquire and release chairperson control  
Follow the steps in Procedure 20 to acquire, or release, chairperson  
control.  
Procedure 20  
Acquire/release chairperson control  
1
To acquire chairperson control, dial *51. The system reacts as follows:  
If another chairperson is present at the conference, the command fails.  
The system notifies the user and returns them to the meeting.  
If there is no active chairperson, the system prompts the user to enter the  
chairperson password for the meeting. If the password is correct, the user  
becomes the chairperson. If the password is incorrect, the system  
prompts the user to retry two more times. If the password is still incorrect,  
the command fails and the system returns the user to the meeting.  
2
To release chairperson control, dial *52. Only the chairperson uses this  
command. When activated, the chairperson becomes a regular conference  
participant allowing someone else to acquire chairperson control.  
This procedure is now complete  
Conferee command summary  
Table 36 lists conference commands that a conferee can execute on the  
telephone set while the conference is in progress.  
Table 36  
Conferee commands  
Conferee command  
Description  
*7  
Volume control.  
*19  
*51  
Self mute/unmute toggle.  
Acquire chairperson control.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
146 Telephone user interface  
Table 36  
Conferee commands (Continued)  
Conferee command  
Description  
*81  
*82  
*83  
*85  
*86  
*99  
Voting: Yes, I agree.  
Voting: No, I disagree.  
Voting: I abstain.  
Question: I request a question.  
Question: I cancel my request for a question.  
Stop or start the initial conference music, which is  
possible only when the conferee is the first person  
joining the conference. The first entry stops it, the  
second entry starts it.  
*
Aborts current command.  
Start or stop the help menu.  
**  
TUI services  
This sections describes TUI services that are used when there is no  
active conference.  
Schedule a conference  
When using the TUI scheduler, first enter the TUI user ID and  
password. If a port is reserved for the TUI, only 31 ports are available  
for conference use. After scheduling a conference using the TUI, the  
BUI can be used to view, modify, or delete the conference.  
The conference defined from the TUI has default attributes. Define the  
conference parameters, through the telephone keypad, at the prompts  
of a guided voice menu. The ICB plays messages when an error is  
made.  
Note: There are up to seven minutes to schedule a conference with  
the TUI. After seven minutes, the ICB sends a voice message  
indicating that the allotted time is over. The ICB then disconnects the  
call.  
The ICB sets up the following default attributes:  
• entry and exit by name  
• no custom greeting  
• no conference expansion  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Telephone user interface 147  
• no name for the name of the conference  
• no name for the name of the chairperson  
To schedule a conference through the TUI, follow the steps in  
Procedure 21  
Use the TUI to schedule a conference  
1
2
3
4
Dial the TUI DN.  
At the prompt, enter your TUI user ID.  
At the prompt, enter your password (6 digits).  
At the prompt, enter the date and time of the conference (optional). The  
default is the current day and time.  
5
6
7
At the prompt, enter the duration of the conference.  
At the prompt, enter the number of ports required for the conference.  
At the prompt, enter the Conferee DN (optional).  
If a DN is not entered, the ICB card generates one. The ICB card determines  
the Chairperson DN automatically.  
8
9
At the prompt, enter the password length (optional).  
At the prompt, enter the language (optional).  
After entering all conference parameters, the ICB requests you to confirm the  
reservation.  
Note: If configured, the web server sends a confirmation E-mail.  
This procedure is now complete  
Record a brandline greeting  
The TUI can be used to record the customized brandline greeting when  
an administrator TUI password is used for the login. Procedure 22  
shows how to use this feature.  
Note: Although the greeting can be recorded in any language, the  
TUI instructions are in English only.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
148 Telephone user interface  
Procedure 22  
Use a brandline greeting  
1
2
Dial the TUI DN. Enter your TUI administrator ID and password.  
The system responds with a menu and steps through how to operate the  
feature.  
The chairperson must activate the brandline greeting from the BUI.  
This procedure is now complete  
The maximum length of the greeting is 10 seconds. The system plays  
greetings to conference participants in the following order:  
1 Initial greeting  
a ICB factory greeting – “Welcome to the conference call.”  
b Brandline greeting – “Welcome to Company XYZ’s conference  
call.This greeting replaces the factory greeting.  
2 Conference-specific greeting – “This is department 201’s weekly  
meeting.”  
In this example, when participants call they hear: “Welcome to  
Company XYZ’s conference call. This is department 201’s weekly  
meeting.”  
Note: Dual-card meetings use the brandline of the primary card, so  
that all participants hear the same greeting.  
Record a conference-specific greeting  
Conference-specific greeting operation is similar to brandline  
greetings, except that they can be recorded by users or administrators.  
The maximum length is configured by an administrator up to 10  
seconds. The system deletes the voice file at the end of the conference  
and it cannot be used for other conferences. Follow the steps in  
Procedure 23 to configure a conference-specific greeting.  
Procedure 23  
Configure a conference-specific greeting  
1
2
Dial the TUI DN. Enter your TUI user or administrator ID and password.  
The system provides a menu with various options.  
Operational steps are as follows:  
a
When scheduling a meeting, the system provides a reference number  
which uniquely identifies the meeting. The system displays this reference  
number in the BUI and in the confirmation E-mail.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Telephone user interface 149  
b
After scheduling the meeting, dial the TUI Services DN, enter login data,  
and select “Record customer greeting” from the voice menu.  
The system prompts you to enter the reference number to identify the  
meeting.  
c
d
Enter the number received in step a.  
The system repeats the number and prompts the user to confirm it or  
re-enter it.  
Confirm or re-enter the number.  
The system provides a menu for recording the greeting similar to that  
used for the brandline greeting.  
This procedure is now complete  
After recording the greeting, it can be later verified, re-recorded, or  
deleted. Meeting details displayed in the BUI indicate whether or not a  
greeting exists.  
This feature also applies to always-on conferences. However, for  
always-on conferences, only the administrator can record the  
conference-specific greeting.  
A greeting recorded for a conference that is part of a recurrent chain  
applies to occurrences following that conference.  
In dual-card meetings, the user or administrator records the custom  
greeting to the primary card. The system automatically copies it to the  
secondary card, so that all callers hear the same greeting.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
150 Telephone user interface  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
151  
Microsoft Outlook GUI  
Purpose  
This chapter describes how to use the Microsoft Outlook/Exchange  
GUI for audio conference scheduling.  
The chapter contains the following sections:  
“Overview” on page 151 – introduces the Microsoft Outlook GUI  
and its system requirements.  
interface that users and super-users can use to schedule  
conferences.  
page 167 – describes the process that users can use to delegate a  
user.  
Overview  
Users using Microsoft Outlook can schedule and manage ICB  
conference information using Microsoft Outlook as an alternative to the  
Browser User Interface. To access the ICB server, use the following  
Microsoft calendar GUIs:  
• Microsoft Outlook, version 2000, XP, or 2003.  
• Microsoft Exchange, version 5.5, 2000, or 2003.  
Since meetings automatically appear in the user’s Outlook calendar,  
the user does not have to book the meeting in two places: Browser User  
Interface and Microsoft Outlook. Microsoft Outlook sends out e-mail  
invitations to all invited parties. When the meeting is created, the  
conference DN and password are added to the e-mail invitation. The  
chairperson information is not added. This information can be verified  
by pressing the Display button.  
ICB conferences can be scheduled up to one year in advance.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
152 Microsoft Outlook GUI  
Recurrent meetings can be created in Microsoft Outlook. Meetings can  
be scheduled up to one year in advance up to 52 occurrences. Since  
Microsoft Outlook allows for longer scheduling, meetings scheduled  
beyond one year are not scheduled in the ICB, but are scheduled in  
Microsoft Outlook. A message is displayed to the user indicating which  
meetings are scheduled in the ICB and which ones are not.  
Meetings created in TUI or BUI will not appear in Microsoft Outlook.  
The super-user functionality is not supported by Microsoft Outlook GUI.  
Users with the type of super-user will act as normal users when  
operating from the Microsoft Outlook GUI.  
When modifying a conference, the play greeting functionality is not  
supported by the Microsoft Outlook GUI.  
Only left-to-right languages are supported by the Microsoft Outlook  
GUI.  
Daylight savings time is not supported. If either the user’s clock, or the  
ICB’s clock (but not both), is changed after a meeting is scheduled, the  
meeting’s start time will be off schedule.  
The conference control screen of an active meeting is displayed only in  
English.  
In Microsoft Outlook 2000, ICB is not informed that a meeting was  
deleted before a delete event message is sent. Therefore, a  
meeting will still exist on the ICB. Before deleting an ICB meeting  
scheduled with the Microsoft Outlook GUI, remove the ICB  
association by un-checking the “ICB Conference” checkbox on  
the ICB tab.  
Administrators cannot schedule permanent or emergency meetings  
using the Microsoft Outlook GUI.  
Publishing the form in Microsoft Outlook  
Before the ICB form can be published in Microsoft Outlook, the ICB  
Administrator must acquire the ICB form.  
Follow the steps in Procedure 24 for the ICB Administrator to get the  
ICB form for the first time.  
to upgrade the ICB form.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Microsoft Outlook GUI 153  
Procedure 24  
ICB Administrator to get the ICB form  
1
2
3
Enter the time zone for the ICB card.  
Define the users that will use the Microsoft Outlook GUI.  
Go to the location of the ICB PC Card and log in using the following username  
and password:  
Username: micb  
Password: admin  
4
Copy the icbf.oft, icbsjc.oft, and icbsk.oft files from the OUTLOOK directory.  
This procedure is now complete  
ICB files must be published in Microsoft Outlook before ICB users can  
access and use the ICB files. Nortel Networks recommends that the  
Microsoft Outlook Administrator publish the ICB files in the  
Organizational Forms Library. Follow the steps in Procedure 25.  
If the ICB files are not published by the Microsoft Outlook administrator,  
ICB users themselves must publish the ICB files in their Personal  
Forms Library. Follow the steps in Procedure 26.  
When publishing upgraded files, be sure to remove the older versions  
from the library. Follow the steps in Procedure 29, “Removing the ICB  
Note 1: The instructions in the following two procedures are specific  
to Microsoft Exchange 5.5. For other systems, contact your Microsoft  
Outlook administrator for specific instructions on publishing form  
files.  
Note 2: If the second procedure is used, each individual Microsoft  
Outlook user must follow Procedure 26.  
The ICB form is based on the following ICB files:  
• form file required for all ICB applications - icbf.oft  
• language files, one or more required for each ICB application:  
— Japanese and Chinese languages - icbsjc.oft  
— Korean language - icbsk.oft  
— All other supported languages - icbs.oft  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
154 Microsoft Outlook GUI  
Procedure 25  
Microsoft Outlook Administrator to publish the ICB files to the  
Organizational Forms Library  
1
2
Open Microsoft Outlook.  
Obtain the ICB form files from the ICB Administrator.  
Note: For each language file (icbs.oft, icbsjc.oft, and icbsk.oft) you are  
publishing, you must complete the following steps.  
a
b
Double-click the name of the file, for example icbs.oft.  
Note: Click No if asked to Enable Macros.  
Click OK in the Select Folder window. The Calendar window opens.  
Note: Do not select a folder from the folder list in the Select Folder  
window.  
Choose Tools > Forms > Publish Form As. The Publish Form As  
window opens. SeeFigure 74.  
Figure 74  
Publish Form As window  
c
d
Select Organizational Forms Library in the Look In field.  
Enter a Display name and Form name as follows:  
If you are publishing icbs.oft, enter icbs  
If you are publishing icbsjc.oft, enter icbsjc  
If you are publishing icbsk.oft, enter icbsk  
e
f
Click Publish.  
Note: Click Yes if asked to replace an existing form.  
Close the Calendar window. Do not save the appointment.  
3
Publish the ICB form file icbf.oft.  
Go to the folder where the ICB files are located.  
a
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Microsoft Outlook GUI 155  
b
c
Double-click icbf.oft. The Calendar window opens.  
Note: Click No if asked to Enable macros.  
Choose Tools > Forms > Publish Form As. The Publish Form As  
window opens. See Figure 74 on page 154 for a depiction.  
d
e
f
Select Organizational Forms Library in the Look In field.  
Enter a Display name and Form name, such as icbf.  
Click Publish.  
Note: Click Yes if asked to replace an existing form.  
g
Close the Calendar window. Do not save the appointment.  
This procedure is now complete  
Procedure 26  
Publishing the ICB form in Microsoft Outlook by each Microsoft Outlook user  
1
Open Microsoft Outlook.  
Note 1: Do not perform this procedure if the ICB files have already been  
published by the Microsoft Outlook administrator.  
Note 2: These instructions are specific to Microsoft Exchange 5.5. For  
other systems, contact your Microsoft Outlook administrator for specific  
instructions on publishing a form.  
2
Obtain the ICB files (form icbf.oft and one or more language files icbs.oft,  
icbsjc.oft, and icbsk.oft) from the ICB Administrator.  
3
4
Save the files in accessible location.  
For each language file (icbs.oft, icbsjc.oft, and icbsk.oft) you are publishing:  
a
Double-click the name of the file, for example icbs.oft.  
Note: Click No if asked to Enable macros.  
b
Click OK in the Select Folder window. The Calendar window opens.  
Note: Do not select a folder from the folder list in the Select Folder  
window.  
c
Choose Tools > Forms > Publish Form As. The Publish Form As  
window opens. See Figure 74 on page 154 for a depiction.  
d
e
Select Personal Forms Library in the Look In field.  
Enter a Display name and a Form name as follows:  
If you are publishing icbs.oft, enter icbs.  
If you are publishing icbsjc.oft, enter icbsjc.  
If you are publishing icbssk.oft, enter icbsk.  
f
Click Publish.  
Note: Click Yes if asked to replace an existing form.  
Close the Calendar window. Do not save the appointment.  
g
5
Publish the ICB form file icbf.oft.  
a
b
Go to the folder where the ICB files are located.  
Double-click icbf.oft. The Calendar window opens.  
Note: Click No if asked to Enable macros.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
156 Microsoft Outlook GUI  
c
Choose Tools > Forms > Publish Form As. The Publish Form As  
window opens. See Figure 74 on page 154 for a depiction.  
Select Personal Forms Library in the Look In field.  
Enter a Display name and a Form name, such as icbf.  
Click Publish.  
d
e
f
Note: Click Yes if asked to replace an existing form.  
g
Close the Calendar window. Do not save the appointment.  
This procedure is now complete  
The ICB files must be published in Microsoft Outlook before the ICB  
user can configure the ICB form as the default Calendar form in  
Microsoft Outlook. When the Microsoft Outlook Administrator has  
published the ICB form to the forms library, follow the steps in  
Procedure 27 on page 156 to configure the ICB form as the default  
Calendar form in Microsoft Outlook.  
Several languages may use the same form name. If an administrator  
needs to have several languages, create a file called “outlangs.tbl”. This  
file should be placed in the Microsoft Outlook folder. This file should  
contain a table describing which language uses which form. See Table  
37 for an example.  
Table 37  
Language form to use  
Language  
Form to use  
icbf.oft  
American English  
French  
icbf.oft  
U.K. English  
Chinese Traditional  
icbf.oft  
cnicb.oft  
Procedure 27  
Select the ICB form as the default form in Microsoft Outlook  
1
Open Microsoft Outlook.  
Note: Before beginning this procedure, obtain the name of the published  
ICB form file. For example, icbf.oft.  
2
3
4
Right-click Calendar in the Folder List.  
Select Properties. The Calendar Properties window opens.  
Select the General tab.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Microsoft Outlook GUI 157  
5
6
Select Forms in When Posting to this folder, use. The Choose Form  
window opens.  
Select the library in which the files were published.  
If you published the forms yourself, select Personal Forms Library in the  
Look In field.  
If the ICB administrator published the files, select Organizational Forms  
Library in the Look In field.  
7
8
9
Select the form name, icbf, and click Open.  
Click OK.  
Verify that you are using the correct version of the ICB form.  
a
b
Double-click a timeslot in the Calendar.  
Choose Help > About this Form from the toolbar. The form version is  
displayed.  
This procedure is now complete  
Follow the steps in Procedure 28 to change the default Calendar form  
back to the Microsoft Outlook Appointment form.  
Procedure 28  
Resetting the default Calendar form for Microsoft Outlook  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Open Microsoft Outlook.  
Right-click Calendar in the Folder List.  
Choose Properties. The Calendar Properties window opens.  
Select the General tab.  
Select Appointment in When posting to this folder, use.  
Click OK.  
This procedure is now complete  
Removing the ICB files from the Personal Forms Library  
When searching for published ICB files, Microsoft Outlook searches  
first in the Personal Forms Library, then in the Organizational Forms  
Library. If upgraded ICB files exist in the Organizational Forms Library,  
and older versions exist in the Personal Forms Library, the new  
upgraded ICB files will never be used. Follow Procedure 29 or  
Procedure 30 to remove previously published ICB files from the  
Personal Forms Library.  
Procedure 29  
Removing the ICB files from the Personal Forms Library (way 1)  
1
2
Open Microsoft Outlook.  
Right-click Calendar in the Folder List.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
158 Microsoft Outlook GUI  
3
4
5
6
Choose Properties. The Calendar Properties window opens.  
Select the Forms tab.  
Click Manage. The Forms Manager window opens.  
Click Set in the left half of the window. The Forms Manager window has two  
Set buttons. The one on the right is inactive.  
7
8
9
Select Personal Forms in the Forms Library.  
Click OK.  
Select the ICB form(s) to be deleted from the list in the panel on the left side  
of the window.  
10  
11  
12  
13  
Click Delete.  
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.  
Click Clear Cash.  
Click Close to close the Forms Manager window.  
14  
Click OK to close the Calendar Properties window.  
This procedure is now complete  
After you remove an ICB form, the Microsoft Outlook Appointment form  
becomes the default Calendar form. See “Select the ICB form as the  
form as the default Calendar form.  
Procedure 30 Removing the ICB files from the Personal Forms  
Library (way 2)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Open Microsoft Outlook.  
Choose Tools. > Options from the file menu. The Options window opens.  
Select the Other tab.  
Click Advanced Options. The Advanced Options window opens.  
Click Custom Forms. The Custom Forms tab opens in the Option window.  
Click Manage Forms. The Forms Manager window opens.  
Select the ICB forms to be deleted.  
Click on Clear Cash.  
9
Click Delete.  
This procedure is now complete  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Microsoft Outlook GUI 159  
Login to the ICB card using Microsoft Outlook  
You need to log into the ICB when you are setting up or editing the ICB  
parameters of a conference. You will use the same ICB user ID and  
password for the ICB form in Microsoft Outlook that you use for the BUI.  
If you have access to more than one ICB card, you must have a user ID  
defined for each card. Follow the steps in Procedure 31 to log into the  
ICB card from Microsoft Outlook.  
Procedure 31  
Log into the ICB card using Microsoft Outlook  
1
If you are not already at the ICB tab, go to the ICB tab Microsoft Outlook.  
a
b
c
d
e
Select Calendar from the Folder List in Microsoft Outlook.  
Click New.  
Select the ICB tab.  
Select the ICB card from the ICB Address drop-down list.  
Select ICB Conference.  
2
Enter your username and password in the Enter Network Password window.  
See Figure 75 for a depiction.  
Figure 75  
Username and Password (Microsoft Outlook)  
a
b
c
d
Enter your user ID in the User Name field.  
Enter your password in the Password field.  
Select Save this password in your password list (optional).  
Click OK.  
This procedure is now complete  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
160 Microsoft Outlook GUI  
Scheduling a new conference  
Scheduling window  
Open a new appointment in Microsoft Outlook after logging into the ICB  
card.  
Figure 76 shows the scheduling window when it first opens after the  
ICB tab has been selected.  
Figure 76  
Microsoft Outlook ICB tab – Schedule a new conference  
Table 38 describes the fields in the Microsoft Outlook ICB tab.  
Table 38  
ICB tab window fields  
Field  
Description  
ICB Address  
ICB conference  
Owner ID  
The IP address or DNS of the ICB card.  
When checked, schedules the conference to the ICB card.  
User name that is logged into the ICB card.  
Chairperson  
Enter the name of the chairperson for this conference.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Microsoft Outlook GUI 161  
Table 38  
ICB tab window fields (Continued)  
Field  
Description  
Start  
Enter the date and time that the conference starts. The minutes box shows  
15-minute increments (that is, 0, 15, 30, and 45).  
Range: Hours/15-minute increments.  
The default value of the time field is rounded to the nearest 15 minutes according  
to the following rule:  
In the first 10 minutes of the interval, the system rounds the time off to the  
past. For example, if the time is 8:23, the box shows the time as 8:15. The  
system interprets this as an immediate conference.  
In the last five minutes of the interval, the system rounds it to the future  
15-minute value. For example, 8:26 appears as 8:30.  
Note: If a change needs to be made to an existing conference, click on the Appointment  
tab to make the necessary changes. That information will be moved to the ICB tab.  
Duration  
Enter the duration of the conference.  
Range: Up to 12 hours in 15-minute increments (the selection box shows all  
possible values).  
Number of  
Participants  
Select the number of participants for this conference from the drop-down box.  
The default value is four.  
Access Numbers  
Select either to automatically assign a number or a specific number from the  
drop-down list.  
Free Ports view  
Figure 77 shows the expanded scheduling window after clicking on the  
Free Ports button. The information in this window refers to the date set  
above it in the Start area. The time scale covers 12 hours in 15-minute  
increments.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
162 Microsoft Outlook GUI  
Figure 77  
ICB tab window – Free Ports view  
Click on the Arrow button to move the range. Each click moves  
the range four hours in the direction of the arrow clicked.  
The middle bar specifies the available ports  
for the time range that the rectangle covers.  
Two bars appear in the middle for dual-card  
conferences: one for each card.  
Options section  
Figure 78 on page 163 shows the expanded window after clicking on  
the Options button.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Microsoft Outlook GUI 163  
Figure 78  
ICB tab window – Options section  
Closes (collapses) the window while still showing the  
window.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
164 Microsoft Outlook GUI  
Table 39 describes the fields in the Options section.  
Table 39  
ICB tab window – Options section fields  
Field  
Description  
Password section  
User Password  
Enter an optional password for the conference. If configured, callers must enter  
this password to join the conference. Available options are as follows:  
No password – no optional password.  
Automatically assigned – The system automatically generates the  
password. The administrator sets the password length from 4 to 8 digits.  
Choose a password – The user defines the password. The range is 4 to 8  
digits. The window shows the password as it is entered. The system does  
not check the password for uniqueness. Different conferences can use the  
same password.  
Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference  
setting.  
Chairperson  
Password  
Enter a password for chairperson authentication. This field has the same  
options as the user password.  
Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference  
setting.  
General Options section  
Indication for entry  
and exit  
Define how the system announces when people enter or exit a conference. The  
following options are available from the pull-down menu:  
Play name on entry and name on exit.  
Play name on entry and tone on exit.  
Play tone on entry and tone on exit.  
Silence (no indication for entry or exit).  
Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference  
setting.  
Language  
Select the language the system uses for voice prompts during the conference.  
The pull-down menu offers the set of languages available in the system. The  
default is the ICB card’s default language that an administrator selects using the  
single-number access, the preferred language takes affect after the caller  
enters the conference ID and password. Before that the system uses the default  
language.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Microsoft Outlook GUI 165  
Table 39  
ICB tab window – Options section fields (Continued)  
Field  
Description  
Add ports if needed When this box is checked, the system allows the meeting to expand beyond the  
number of reserved ports if more than the anticipated number of participants  
show up. The system adds ports only if there are enough ports available (that  
is, they are not reserved for another meeting).  
Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference  
setting.  
Keep one port for  
chairperson  
Click on this box to reserve a port for the chairperson. When all but one of the  
ports are occupied, and the chairperson has not yet dialed in, the remaining port  
is not available for a participant. If this box is not checked, the system uses the  
ports on a first-come, first-serve basis. In this case, if all the ports are taken up  
by participants, the system does not allow the chairperson to enter the  
conference.  
Note: The default setting is determined by the Administrator’s default conference  
setting.  
Scheduling complete  
After scheduling a new meeting or modifying an existing meeting, the  
Confirmation window appears to verify the entries. The system displays  
the window after it stores the conference in the database. See Figure  
79 for an example.  
Figure 79  
Confirmation window  
Click on the OK button  
to close this window.  
The system returns to the  
Calendar window.  
Editing an existing conference  
Open the conference appointment in Microsoft Outlook for editing. The  
only field that cannot be modified when editing an inactive conference  
is the dual-card meeting option (that is, users cannot make a  
single-card conference dual and vice versa).  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
166 Microsoft Outlook GUI  
Only the following fields can be edited during an active conference:  
• number of participants  
• duration  
• add ports as needed (under the Options section)  
Once a conference is scheduled with the Microsoft Outlook GUI, the  
ICB tab looks like Figure 80. The Control button allows a user to  
access the chairperson control section of the BUI for this scheduled  
conference. Refer to the “Chairperson operations” on page 98 for  
operation information. The Display button provides the conference  
access and meeting password information for users and the  
chairperson. See Figure 81 for a depiction of this window.  
Figure 80  
ICB tab window – edit conference  
Figure 81  
ICB tab window – display information  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Microsoft Outlook GUI 167  
Setting a delegate user for Microsoft Outlook Calendar  
A user can give another person sharing permission to schedule  
appointments and meetings for them in their calendar. The delegate  
Outlook feature allows the user to specify for the person whether or not  
they can modify and create meetings and appointments. Scheduling an  
ICB meeting is operated the same way.  
To use the delegate feature with the ICB form:  
• The person who schedules the meeting and the person that gives  
permission must have accounts in the ICB card. The owner of the  
meeting is the one that gave permission.  
• When using Microsoft Outlook 2003, the script in shared folders  
must be enabled. (Tools > Options > Other > Advanced Options).  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
168 Microsoft Outlook GUI  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
169  
Maintenance  
Purpose  
This chapter describes how to maintain and troubleshoot the ICB card  
and associated equipment.  
The chapter contains the following sections:  
maintenance strategy.  
shows the process for updating the Microsoft Outlook GUI form.  
“Diagnostic tools” on page 174 – lists the available maintenance  
tools.  
“CLI command summary” on page 178 – shows the commands  
technicians can use from the CLI to perform maintenance activities.  
faults and shows recommended recovery actions.  
“Error message handling” on page 183 – describes the on-line  
error message system.  
procedures for backing up and restoring data.  
Maintenance overview  
Perform operations, administration, and maintenance (OA&M) of the  
ICB system by using the command line interface (CLI). Access the CLI  
through the following:  
• A TTY terminal connected to the ICB card or through a PC  
emulating a terminal. The PC connects to the ICB card through the  
Ethernet Adapter.  
• The administration BUI.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
170 Maintenance  
An operator can use the CLI to generate reports and perform port  
maintenance. An administrator can use the CLI to manage system  
administration, maintenance, and security.  
To conduct conference OA&M for an ICB card, connect a terminal to the  
RS-232 port or the Ethernet connector associated with that ICB card.  
The maintenance terminal connects to each ICB card through an IPE  
module I/O panel connector or through the Ethernet adapter card.  
The Ethernet adapter provides two options:  
• direct terminal connection or modem connection to DB-9 connector  
• Ethernet connection, where multiple terminals connected to the  
Ethernet can access an ICB card  
For the Ethernet connection option, an IP address assigned to the ICB  
card is required to enable access to the ICB through the LAN.  
Figure 82 shows an Meridian system with two IPE modules. This  
example shows each IPE module with one ICB card. Each ICB card  
connects to its maintenance terminal through the associated IPE  
module I/O panel connector. Use one terminal for all ICB cards by  
moving the terminal cable to the I/O panel connector of the card to be  
accessed.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance 171  
Figure 82  
ICB card in the Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module  
Maintenance  
Terminal  
IPE Module  
ICB Card  
IPE Module  
ICB Card  
VT 100 OA&M  
Maintenance  
Terminal  
VT 100 OA&M  
Intelligent Peripheral  
Equipment (IPE) Module  
G100009  
Problem solving  
A problem can have more than one cause. To isolate the cause, a  
knowledge of ICB operation is required. After identifying the cause, the  
problem can be corrected by replacing defective cards, connecting  
accidentally disconnected cables, or correcting software security  
problems. The Meridian system and the ICB provide built-in  
self-diagnostic indicators and software and hardware tools. These  
diagnostic facilities simplify system troubleshooting and reduce  
mean-time-to-repair (MTTR).  
Make sure that the Meridian system is operating correctly, before  
diagnosing ICB problems.  
FOR MORE INFORMATION  
Refer to the following:  
553-3011-500 Small System Maintenance  
553-3021-500 Large System Maintenance  
553-3031-500 CS 1000S System Maintenance  
553-3041-500 CS 1000E System Maintenance  
555-4001-129 Meridian SL-100 Intelligent Peripheral  
Equipment (IPE) Reference Manual  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
172 Maintenance  
Updating the Microsoft Outlook GUI ICB form  
When the ICB form needs to be updated in Microsoft Outlook, the form  
needs to be updated first by the Administrator. The Administrator will  
then notify users that the ICB form needs to be updated. The procedure  
to publish the new form is the same as publishing the original form. See  
page 155 for the procedure details.  
Users need to clear cache when the ICB form does not exist in  
Microsoft Outlook. Follow Procedure 32 for the steps.  
Procedure 32  
Clearing the Microsoft Outlook forms Cache  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Open Microsoft Outlook.  
Choose Tools > Options. The Options window opens.  
Select the Other tab.  
Click Advanced Options. The Advanced Options window opens.  
Click Custom Forms. The Options window opens.  
Click Manage Forms. The Forms Manager window opens.  
Click Clear Cache.  
If no Clear Cache button is available, you must delete the forms cache file  
manually, follow the steps in Procedure 33.  
8
Click Close to close the Forms Manager window.  
Click OK to close the Options window.  
9
10  
11  
Click OK to close the Advanced Options window.  
Click OK to close the Options window.  
This procedure is now complete  
Procedure 33 Deleting the forms cache file manually  
1
2
Close Microsoft Outlook.  
Go to the folder where the forms cache file is located.  
If you are using User Profiles, go to  
C:\Windows\Profiles\<username>\LocalSettings\Application  
Data\Microsoft\Forms  
If you are not using User Profiles, go to  
C:\Windows\Local Settings\Application  
Data\Microsoft\Forms  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Maintenance 173  
3
Delete the file Frmcache.dat.  
This procedure is now complete  
Each upgrade of the ICB firmware comes with upgraded ICB files,  
which must be retrieved and published. See Procedure 45, “Upgrade  
34 to upgrade the ICB form in the Organizational Forms Library.  
Procedure 34 Upgrading the ICB form in the Organizational Forms  
Library  
1
Retrieve the upgraded ICB files.  
a
b
c
Go to the folder where the ICB files are stored.  
Delete all .OFT files except icbf.oft, icbs.oft, icbsjc.oft, and icbsk.oft.  
Rename an existing ICB form files, using names such as “icbf_old.oft”,  
“icbs_old.oft”, “icbsjc_old.oft”, and “icbsk_old.oft”.  
Note: Nortel Networks recommends that customers keep only one  
previous version of the ICB files.  
d
e
Go to the location of the ICB PC Card and log in using the following  
username and password.  
Username: micb  
Password: admin  
Copy the icbf.oft, icbs.oft, icbsjc.oft, and icbsk.oft files from the  
OUTLOOK directory.  
2
3
4
Remove older versions from the library. Follow the steps in Procedure 29 on  
Publish the new upgraded forms. Follow the steps in Procedure 26 on page  
155.  
Clear the Microsoft Outlook forms cache. Follow the steps in Procedure 32 on  
This procedure is now complete  
Users can now install the new form as their default form.  
Follow the steps in Procedure 35 to obtain, publish, and install the  
upgraded ICB form in the Personal Forms Library.  
Procedure 35 Upgrading the ICB form in the Personal Forms  
Library  
1
2
Remove the current form. Follow the steps in Procedure 30 on page 158.  
If the ICB administrator has not published the form, follow the steps in  
Procedure 26 on page 155 to publish the form in the Personal Forms Library.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
174 Maintenance  
3
Set the new upgraded form as the default Calendar form. Follow the steps in  
4
5
Clear the Microsoft Outlook forms cache using Procedure 32 on page 172.  
Schedule a test meeting to ensure the upgrade was successful. Follow the  
This procedure is now complete  
Diagnostic tools  
Use the following diagnostic tools to troubleshoot problems in the  
system, including problems with the ICB. When diagnosing ICB  
problems, use the following tools:  
• LED indicators  
• display codes  
• card self-tests  
• sanity monitoring  
• diagnostic commands (that is, overlay commands for the CS 1000  
and MAP commands for the CS 2100/Meridian SL-100)  
• history files  
• TCP/IP connectivity test  
ICB status LED indicator  
The ICB has a red LED indicator at the top of the faceplate that  
indicates the status of the card. If the LED is lit, the card can be faulty  
or manual busy (Man). The card goes through a series of tests. When  
inserted into the slot or reset, the card:  
• blinks three times during self-test  
• runs software files from the PCMCIA to the ICB card  
• blinks three more times  
• stays on until a return to service (RTS) occurs  
This procedure takes approximately 45 seconds. If the card turns on  
and remains on without blinking, the card is not functioning correctly.  
The LED turns off when the card returns to service.  
Power Up Self-test  
The ICB card has testability features that aid in fault isolation. When  
inserted into an operating system module, when it is powered up, or  
when the system is reset, each ICB card automatically performs a  
Power Up Self-test. A Power Up Self-test can be performed on a card  
using software commands or menus.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Maintenance 175  
The self-test checks general ICB functions and determines if they are  
operating correctly. The checks are useful when first installing the  
cards, because the card automatically starts the self-test when  
inserted. The self-test provides an immediate indication of the card’s  
operating status by performing a detailed test and analysis of the  
installed hardware. The test determines the integrity of the hardware  
and establishes the connection of the ICB card.  
The Power Up Self-test is executed through the maintenance port. If  
any fault has been detected, an error message is stored in the system  
log file and is printed on the maintenance port.  
Table 40 describes the items the system checks during the ICB  
self-test.  
Table 40  
ICB self-test sequence  
Item tested  
Description  
Processor/Co-processor  
SDRAM  
Reads and stores processor ID. Runs processor self-test.  
Checks the amount of SDRAM installed. Performs read/write test.  
Performs read/write test on selected registers.  
Performs read/write test on selected registers.  
Tests shared memory and performs loopback test over SD-30 LCA.  
System I/O Controller  
PCMCIA Controller  
DS-30X Interface  
On-board DSP card  
Checks the presence of DSP cards and initiates diagnostic tests on DSP  
cards, if present.  
PCMCIA hard drive  
PCMCIA Flash card  
Loopback MPU  
Checks the presence of the hard drive and checks the configuration  
information.  
Checks the presence of Flash memory and checks configuration  
information.  
Sends data to the transmit area of the MPU buffers and resends it back  
for the receive area to the same buffer.  
Loopback DSP  
Sends data to the transmit area of the MPU buffers and resends it back  
for the receive area to the same buffer.  
Signaling Tests  
Signaling tests check the x12 interfaces in both directions between the  
card and system. This test includes reception of the messages from the  
system and sending messages to the system. The Signaling test is  
executed from Overlay 30 using the UNTT command (Meridian 1/CS  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
176 Maintenance  
1000) or from the IPE MAP Level using the Tst command (CS  
2100/Meridian SL-100).  
Sanity monitoring  
Sanity monitoring is a background routine that checks the operation of  
system resources, such as CPU activity and memory allocation. This  
background routine tries to restore normal operation if the system  
performance has degraded to an unacceptable level. If all attempts to  
restore normal operation fail, this routine restarts the system to restore  
operation. If the soft reset is not effective, the system initiates a full,  
board-level reset. If the full reset is not successful, the maintenance  
LED remains on.  
Diagnostic commands  
Meridian 1/CS 1000 overlay commands  
Each card performs diagnostic tests as part of the daily routines.  
Diagnostic tests can also be activated from a maintenance TTY.  
The boot time of the ICB from reset, or power up, to when the card is  
ready and from an ENLC to when the ports are idle is approximately two  
minutes.  
All relevant system maintenance commands for an extended digital line  
card apply to the ICB and are handled transparently to the system. Use  
LD32 to enable and disable an ACD M2616 telephone.  
Table 41 lists some of the commands used to control the ICB status and  
functions.  
Table 41  
Commands to enable/disable ICB channels  
Command  
Operation performed  
LD 32  
DISC/ENLC  
DISU/ENLU  
LOOP  
Disable/Enable specified card.  
Disable/Enable specified channel.  
Performs a network memory test, continuity test, and  
signaling test on the specified loop.  
STAT  
Get status of specified card/channel.  
LD 30  
UNTT  
Performs self-test on the ICB.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Maintenance 177  
CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 diagnostic commands  
Each card performs diagnostic tests as part of the daily routines.  
Diagnostic tests can be activated from the MAP terminal on the CS  
2100/Meridian SL-100. The ICB card appears as an extended digital  
line card to the system. For the diagnostic routine to pass in the LTP  
level of the MAP terminal, the feature Communicator must be assigned  
to key 1 of the LEN.  
Table 42 lists commands used to control the ICB status and functions.  
Table 42  
CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 commands to enable/disable ICB channels  
Command  
Operation performed  
IPE MAP Level  
Bsy Card x/ RTS card x Disable/enable specified card.  
Tst  
Perform a network memory test, continuity test, and signaling test on the  
specified loop.  
QueryPM Inven Card x  
Get status of specified card.  
LTP MAP Level  
Bsy  
Make the LEN or DN busy.  
Bsy INB  
RTS  
Take the port out of service. The system does not generate alarms.  
Bring the ICB port in-service.  
Note: During a One Night Process (ONP), a no restart switch activity  
(SWACT) to the other central processing unit (CPU) drops active  
calls on the ICB card. A warm SWACT of the front end during  
maintenance activities does not affect active calls on the ICB card.  
TCP/IP connectivity test  
Maintenance technicians can use “ping” to test if the LAN connection is  
installed and configured properly. Perform a ping test in one of the  
following ways (they are equivalent so there is no need to try both):  
• from a computer on the local LAN to the ICB card’s IP address  
• from the CLI (under the SMaint/ directory) to the IP address of a  
computer on the local LAN  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
178 Maintenance  
CLI command summary  
Using CLI commands  
The CLI contains menus and submenus. To select a menu option, enter  
the appropriate short command or full command at the prompt. When  
a menu is selected, use the commands in Table 43 to navigate to other  
menus or to display help.  
Table 43  
Navigating the menus and displaying help  
Command  
Result  
*
/
Returns to the previous menu.  
Returns to the top menu level.  
Displays help for the commands in the current menu.  
?
When entering a menu option that has parameters defined, the “Modify,  
Save, or Cancel:” command line displays so that the parameters can be  
modified, if required.  
To modify system parameters and objects, use one or more of the  
commands in Table 44 and Table 45.  
Table 44  
Modifying parameters  
Command  
Result  
M
S
Modifies one or more parameters.  
Saves modified parameters.  
C
Cancels the modification and allows the parameter to keep its previous value.  
Table 45  
Modifying objects  
Command  
<cr>  
Result  
Accepts the current value when the Enter key is pressed.  
value <cr>  
Changes the attribute with a new value when the value is entered and the Enter  
key is pressed.  
.
Cancels the modification and allows the object to keep its previous value.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Maintenance 179  
To modify a value or attribute of an object, the program responds with  
a sequence of prompts: one prompt for each attribute of the object. The  
prompt defines the name and the current value of the attribute. You can  
change the value, accept the current value, or cancel the modification  
as follows:  
attribute_a (current_value_a): new_value_a <cr>  
attribute_b (current_value_b): <cr>  
attribute_c (current_value_c): .  
The system can display the current value and a list of available values  
to select. In the following example, the value of attribute_d changes to  
bbbb:  
attribute_d (current_d, (1-aaaa, 2-bbbb, 3-cccc)): 2  
When executing the command(s), the program provides the option to  
modify, save, or cancel the changes. When Save is entered, the system  
accepts the changes. After the session ends, use the commands in  
Table 43 on page 178 to navigate through the menus.  
ICB CLI commands  
Table 46 shows ICB-specific CLI commands.  
Table 46  
ICB CLI command summary  
Menu and command  
Items and commands  
System administration:  
SA  
System Attributes Editor: SY  
Use the System Attributes Editor for initial card configuration (see  
Procedure 13 on page 71) and to define the following:  
card name – up to 10 characters; appears in top of the initial window  
if specified.  
refresh period – time between updates to CLI window when not in  
use, from 0 to 60 minutes (default is 5 minutes). 0 disables system  
status display.  
short occupancy – detects short connection time of an ICB port.  
Connection times less than the threshold can indicate a bad  
connection of incorrect DN dialed. When this occurs, the system  
increments a counter. When the system checks counters, it displays  
those with peg counts as potential problems.  
subnet mask – the subnet mask of the ICB  
gateway IP address – the gateway IP address of the ICB  
IP address – the IP address of the ICB  
disconnect lone participant – time before system disconnects a single  
participant in a conference (default is 30 minutes).  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
180 Maintenance  
Table 46  
ICB CLI command summary (Continued)  
Menu and command  
Items and commands  
System Maintenance:  
SM  
System Test: ST  
To perform system component tests enter:  
i – perform in-service tests that do not disrupt service  
o – perform out-of-service tests  
Maintenance Report Browser: MR  
Browse maintenance reports by date. For more information, see “CLI  
Ping Test:  
Enter a computer’s IP address to test IP connectivity with this computer.  
Short Connection Report: SC  
Browse short connection reports by date (see “CLI Short Connection  
Database Archive: AR  
Backup the customer database (see “Backup” on page 134).  
Database Restore: RE  
Restore the customer database (see “Restore” on page 192).  
Card Restart: CR  
Restarts ICB card and begins software reload.  
Message Analysis Tool: SHO  
Prints information about an error message that is entered (see “Error  
Message Filtering: ERR  
Enables the filtering of error messages (see “Configure error message  
Data Conversion: CONVERT  
Copies the data from the upper PCMCIA, converts to ICB Release 4  
format, and stores it in the lower PCMCIA.  
Protected administration: Password Editor: PS  
Functionality Upgrade: FU  
Performs a functionality upgrade.  
The system prompts for the number of ports and for the keycode that must  
be entered in three rows of eight characters each. The system will then  
prompt for which feature (can be either advanced or basic).  
Software Upgrade: SW  
Performs a software upgrade.  
The system first prompts for the source: upper socket or FTP. If FTP is  
entered, the system then prompts for IP address, path to file, login, and  
password.  
Administrator BUI Reset: AB  
Reset passwords to the default (that is, 000000) of all administrators that  
use the BUI.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance 181  
Table 46  
ICB CLI command summary (Continued)  
Menu and command  
Items and commands  
Port maintenance:  
PM  
Port Status Display: PS  
Displays status of all ICB ports as follows: Idle, Dialing_out, Ringing,  
Talking, or Disabled.  
Port Disconnect: PD  
Disconnect a specific port from the conference.  
Report Generation:  
RG  
Meetings Log Browser: ML  
Browse the meeting log (see “CLI Meetings Log Report” on page 199).  
Log ordering: ORDer_mlog  
Prompts for the same parameters (year, month, day) and displays the log  
contents sorted by access DN. The advantage is that all records of each  
specific conference appear together.  
ICB fault isolation and correction  
Alarm clearing procedures for the ICB are the identical to those for  
other IPE cards.  
FOR MORE INFORMATION  
Refer to the following documents for additional information about  
how to clear alarms:  
Meridian 1 Fault Clearing  
Meridian SL-100 – Alarm Clearing Procedures  
Table 47 describes ICB service problems and the test procedures used  
to solve these problems.  
Note: If the problem cannot be solved after using all available  
diagnostic tools and test procedures, list the symptoms observed and  
contact your Nortel Networks representative.  
Table 47  
ICB equipment problems  
Symptoms  
Diagnosis  
Solution  
Red card LED on Card is disabled or  
Check the card status and perform a self-test on the  
card by pulling it out and plugging it back in, or from the  
CLI using the cr command under the SMaint menu.  
the ICB is  
faulty.  
permanently on.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
182 Maintenance  
Table 47  
ICB equipment problems (Continued)  
Symptoms  
Diagnosis  
Solution  
Display on the  
controller card  
shows fault  
codes.  
Card faulty, failed  
Refer to the Meridian 1 and CS 1000 Input/Output  
Administration Guide or Meridian SL-100 Log Report  
Reference Manual for a description of the fault codes.  
Based on the description, take the appropriate action to  
resolve the problem.  
self-test, or problem  
communicating with  
peripheral equipment.  
Error messages  
the TTY terminal  
or the MAP  
Hardware or software Note the error messages. Refer to the Meridian 1 and  
problems with the  
ICB.  
CS 1000 Input/Output Administration Guide or Meridian  
SL-100 Log Report Reference Manual for their  
description. Based on the description, take the  
appropriate action to resolve the problem.  
displays.  
Card replacement  
The ICB uses PCMCIA technology which enables the ICB to be  
removed from the IPE shelf indefinitely without losing the configuration  
data. Before replacing the PCMCIA card, back up the data on the card  
so that it does not have to be re-entered (see “Backup and restore  
procedures” on page 187). Use Procedure 36 to replace an ICB card.  
Procedure 36  
Replace a card  
1
2
3
4
5
Prepare for this procedure (see Procedure 1 on page 46).  
Disable the ICB card.  
Remove the card from its card slot in the IPE module.  
Remove all PCMCIA cards from the old ICB card.  
Transfer all PCMCIA cards to the new ICB card. Keep the packaging material  
from the new card.  
This procedure moves all software, configuration, and records to the  
replacement ICB card.  
6
Transfer the Security Device from the old ICB to the replacement.  
The new card reuses the keycode. The keycode remains on the PCMCIA  
card, which was removed from the old ICB.  
7
8
Enable the new card.  
Package the old ICB card using the packaging material from the new card.  
Ship the card to the repair center.  
This procedure is now complete  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Maintenance 183  
Error message handling  
The ICB provides enhanced message handling that includes the  
following:  
• Fixed message format and unique message codes.  
• Categorization of messages by severity.  
• Message analysis tool that provides on-line documentation.  
• Message filtering based on such items as severity and firmware  
component.  
• Advanced troubleshooting.  
Note: Since the on-line documentation is always available and  
accurate according to the cards firmware version, this guide does not  
document specific error messages.  
Error messages format  
The general format of error messages is as follows:  
<serial number> <severity> <error code> <timestamp> <error text>  
Table 48 describes the error message fields.  
Table 48  
Error message field formats  
Field  
Description  
<serial number>  
Four digits that provide a sequence for the messages. It starts at 0001 at  
power-up and increments by one for each message issued. It wraps around  
when it reaches 9999.  
<severity>  
Severity levels are as follows:  
CRITICAL – indicates immediate corrective action is required (for example, the  
application cannot continue and/or the card must be restarted).  
MAJOR – indicates urgent corrective action is required (for example, the BUI  
doesn’t work, but call processing continues to operate).  
MINOR – indicates the existence of a fault condition; corrective action should be  
taken to prevent a more serious fault. For example, a problem affecting a single  
channel is minor, so long as the system is still fully operational.  
WARNING – indicates a low level failure that almost does not impact a  
customer. No corrective action is required, because auto-recovery is performed.  
Frequent appearance can indicate a more serious problem.  
INFO – shows normal operational event notifications (for example, state  
changes in hardware or software; time and date changes).  
DEBUG – for use by designers only.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
184 Maintenance  
Table 48  
Error message field formats (Continued)  
Field  
Description  
<error code>  
Unique identifier of the event being reported. It is made up of the following two  
parts:  
a string of up to six letters indicating the firmware component that originates  
the message  
three decimal digits comprising the error number within this component  
<timestamp>  
Date and time of the message in the format MM-DD hh:mm:ss:ff, where:  
MM = month number.  
DD = day of the month.  
hh = hour (in 24-hour format).  
mm = minutes.  
ss = seconds.  
fff = fraction of second, in milliseconds.  
<error text>  
Short description of the problem or event, and related parameters (for example,  
port number).  
Error message procedures  
Follow the steps in Procedure 37 to view the on-line error message  
documentation.  
Procedure 37  
Access the on-line error message analysis tool  
1
2
Access the CLI SM directory and enter the following:  
SHO  
The CLI prompts you for to enter the error code.  
Enter the error code for which you want information:  
For example, enter:  
MNGMMI109  
Note: The letters are case sensitive and must be entered exactly as they  
appear in the error message.  
The CLI prints the following related information about the message:  
<Syntax> – definition of the message syntax.  
Meaning – shows what the message indicates.  
Parameters – description of the message parameters (fields).  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Maintenance 185  
Action – steps to follow to isolate the problem and/or fix it.  
Impact – possible effects of the event.  
This procedure is now complete  
The entire file of error descriptions is available as a readable text. It can  
be retrieved from the ICB to a PC for off-line reference. Follow the steps  
in Procedure 38 to retrieve the error description file to a PC.  
Procedure 38  
Retrieve the entire error message file to a PC  
1
2
The entire file of error descriptions is a readable text file. From your PC’s  
desktop access FTP.  
To download the entire file, enter the following path:  
a:gnr\errors.txt  
This procedure is now complete  
The output of messages can be suppressed according to pre-defined  
criteria. This functionality enables a technician to focus on a specific  
group of messages to improve productivity. Messages that keep  
reappearing due to known circumstances which are not necessary to  
see can be suppressed.  
The filtering criteria are as follows:  
• Severity of messages – only messages with the selected severity  
levels appear. Any combination is possible.  
• Firmware component – only messages with the selected firmware  
component appear. Any combination is possible.  
• Detailing level:  
— Low – the message appears without the <error text> part. The  
full description can be retrieved using the message analysis tool  
based on the error code.  
— High – the full message appears.  
All filtering criteria can be defined separately for appearance on the CLI  
and for storage in error log files (that is, a selected group of messages  
can be defined to appear in the CLI, but not in the error log, or visa  
versa).  
Follow the steps in Procedure 39 on page 186 to configure message  
filtering.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
186 Maintenance  
Procedure 39  
Configure error message filtering  
1
Access the CLI SM directory and enter the following:  
ERR  
The CLI displays command inputs in the following three sections:  
FORMAT  
CLI_SEVERITY_FILTER  
DISK_SEVERITY_FILTER  
2
You can edit the values as per normal CLI usage.  
Note: If you use the second level login command, two more filter sections are  
available: CLI_FW_COMPONET_FILTER and DISK_FW_COMPONENT_FILTER.  
EXAMPLE:  
ps  
// technician enters err  
// ICB displays section name and its parameters, and prompts for action:  
section [FORMAT]  
CLI error message format: long  
Disk error message format: short // default is long for both  
Modify, Next section, Cancel:  
n
// next: go to next section  
section [CLI_SEVERITY_FILTER] // filter CLI messages by severity  
Critical: yes // yes means that the message will appear  
MAJOR: yes  
MINOR: yes  
WARNING: yes  
INFO: yes  
DEBUG: yes  
Modify, Next section, Cancel  
n
// next: go to next section  
section [DISK_SEVERITY_FILTER] // filter CLI messages in disk file  
Critical: yes // yes means that the message will appear  
MAJOR: yes  
MINOR: yes  
WARNING: yes  
INFO: yes  
DEBUG: yes  
Modify, Next section, Cancel://  
This procedure is now complete  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance 187  
Advanced troubleshooting  
The ICB provides the following tools for technicians to troubleshoot and  
debug problems based on error messages:  
Automatic trace back – the system prints an automatic trace back  
list of predefined error codes. This feature helps software designers  
solve errors.  
Automatic E-mail notification – the system can send an E-mail  
notification containing a predefined list of error codes to the  
administrator, or other address.  
Automatic card restart – ICB restarts can be performed for a  
predefined list of error codes. This feature enhances automatic  
recovery.  
Note: All the actions defined above can be limited to a predefined  
number of occurrences, with a separate limit for each action.  
Backup and restore procedures  
Files can be backed up and restored from either the CLI or the  
Administration BUI.  
Backup  
An administrator schedules the backup from the administration BUI.  
Table 49 shows the items to consider when scheduling an automatic  
backup. Some of these items also apply to an immediate backup.  
Table 49  
Backup considerations  
Item  
Description  
Content  
Specify which of the following items to backup (the default is never; that is, no backup;  
however, if another option is selected in the “Schedule” section the default contents is  
data only):  
Data – configuration, brandline greeting, and scheduling data (future conferences).  
Reports – includes error logs.  
Customized greetings – greetings for future meetings. Note, because this item  
can reach a large file size, a technician may prefer to exclude it.  
Time  
The database can be backed up immediately, or scheduled as a daily, weekly or  
monthly backup. For scheduled backups, determine the:  
hour of the backup (hours only, no minutes)  
day of the week, if weekly  
day of the month, if monthly (1-28 only)  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
188 Maintenance  
Table 49  
Backup considerations (Continued)  
Item  
Description  
Destination Backup files to one of the following destinations:  
The secondary PCMCIA device, inserted in the upper slot of the ICB card.  
A remote FTP server. The system compresses (zips) the backup files, before  
transferring them. Specify the server’s IP address, remote folder path, FTP login,  
and password for the remote server. The system names the ZIP file according to  
the date. It does not overwrite previous backups.  
Note: The remote folder must be an existing folder in the remote server; if this path is not found,  
the system puts the backup file in the folder reached directly by FTP.  
An E-mail destination. The system compresses (zips) the backup files before  
sending them. The E-mail address is the same one the system uses for other  
administration E-mails (for example, reports and aged conferences).  
During the backup process the card remains operational. However, the  
system denies database changes and does not accept the following  
operations:  
• setting up a new conference or modifying an existing conference  
(allows view only)  
• recording a custom greeting  
• making configuration changes including users, always on meeting,  
and groups  
Scheduled backup  
Figure 83 shows the Scheduled Backup window accessed from the ICB  
Dashboard. For more information about the ICB Dashboard, see “ICB  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance 189  
Figure 83  
ICB Dashboard – Scheduled Backup window  
The administrator defines the time, destination and contents of the  
backup. Table 50 describes these three sections of the Scheduled  
Backup window.  
Table 50  
Scheduled Backup parameters  
Section  
Description  
Schedule  
Click on an radio button to define the backup schedule as follows:  
Daily – every day at the hour specified.  
Weekly – once a week on the specified day, at the specified hour.  
Monthly – once a month on the specified day (1-28), at the specified  
hour.  
Never – the system does not perform an automatic backup (the  
default).  
The hour section is to the round hour (that is, hh:00), AM or PM.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
190 Maintenance  
Table 50  
Scheduled Backup parameters (Continued)  
Section  
Description  
Destination  
Click on an radio button to define the backup destination as follows:  
The secondary PCMCIA device, inserted in the upper slot of the ICB  
card (the default).  
An E-mail destination. The system compresses the backup files,  
before sending them. The administrator defines the Administrator’s  
E-mail address in the General Setting window (see Figure 57 on page  
114).  
A remote FTP server. The parameters for the FTP session must be  
defined, as shown in the boxes below the FTP radio button. The  
system compresses the files, before transferring them. The system  
names the ZIP file according to date, so that it does not overwrite  
previous backups.  
Contents  
Click on one or more box as shown in the window to select the contents  
of the backup. Data is the default.  
Manual Backup  
An administrator uses the window in Figure 84 to perform a one-time,  
manual backup.  
Figure 84  
ICB Dashboard – Manual Backup window  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance 191  
The Destination and Contents sections are the same as for an  
automatic backup. Open a CLI window by clicking on the CLI button on  
the top frame of the dashboard. Click on the Do Backup button to  
activate an immediate backup according to your selected options.  
Note: If the Do Backup button is clicked with no CLI window open,  
a pop-up message requests the administrator to open a CLI window.  
Billing scheduled backup  
An Administrator uses the window in Figure 85 to defines the time and  
destination of the billing backup. Table 51 on page 192 describes these  
two sections of the Billing Scheduled Backup window.  
Figure 85  
Billing scheduled backup window  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
192 Maintenance  
Table 51  
Billing Scheduled Backup parameters  
Section  
Description  
Schedule  
Click on an radio button to define the backup schedule as follows:  
Daily – every day at the hour specified.  
Weekly – once a week on the specified day, at the specified hour.  
Monthly – once a month on the specified day (1-28), at the specified  
hour.  
Never – the system does not perform an automatic backup (the  
default).  
The hour section is to the round hour (that is, hh:00), AM or PM.  
Destination  
Click on an radio button to define the backup destination as follows:  
The secondary PCMCIA device, inserted in the upper slot of the ICB  
card (the default).  
An E-mail destination. The system compresses the backup files,  
before sending them. The administrator defines the Administrator’s  
E-mail address in the General Setting window (see Figure 57 on page  
114).  
A remote FTP server. The parameters for the FTP session must be  
defined, as shown in the boxes below the FTP radio button. The  
system compresses the files, before transferring them. The system  
names the ZIP file according to date, so that it does not overwrite  
previous backups.  
View Backup History Log  
The administrator can view a history log of past scheduled backups to  
make sure that the backups have taken place as scheduled. The  
Backup History Log window is a view-only window and shows each  
backup attempt as one line: time stamp (dd/mm/yyyy hh:mm:ss) and  
message. The message shows the type of backup (automatic or  
manual), destination, and success or failure. The events appear with  
the most recent backup on the top of the list.  
View Last Backup Details  
The Last Backup Details view-only window prints out the details of the  
last backup attempt (either scheduled or manual). This is the same text  
that appears on the CLI during a backup.  
Restore  
Use Procedure 40 on page 193 to restore the database from the  
secondary PCMCIA device.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Maintenance 193  
Procedure 40  
Restore the database from the secondary PCMCIA  
1
2
Insert the PCMCIA device holding the backed-up database in the ICB card’s  
upper slot.  
Use the CLI REstordb command in the SMaint directory.  
The system prompts you for the source of the restore.  
Select upper socket and press the Enter key.  
3
The system restores the database.  
This procedure is now complete  
Use Procedure 41 to restore the database from a backed-up ZIP file.  
Procedure 41  
Restore the database from a backed up ZIP file  
1
2
3
Determine which backed-up ZIP files to restore.  
Name this file on the file server ICBDATA.ZIP.  
Run the REstordb command with the parameter indicating this is a restore  
following an FTP download.  
The system prompts for the source.  
4
5
Select FTP.  
The system prompts for the following parameters: IP address, path to file,  
login, and password.  
Enter the information as appropriate and press the Enter key.  
The system restores the data.  
This procedure is now complete  
During the restore process the card disables itself and does not answer  
calls. It also does not accept changes from the BUI.  
Backup and restore process log  
The backup process sends messages to the CLI window. The  
messages can be viewed while the process is running by accessing the  
CLI.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
194 Maintenance  
The system generates two files that contain information about the  
backup progress. The backup.log in the USER directory contains one  
line for each of the last backups, and restorations, up to a maximum of  
20. Each line contains the following:  
• a time stamp  
• whether it was a manual or scheduled backup to  
— disk or  
— E-mail  
• whether it was a restoration and from which source  
• whether it was successful or failed  
The LASTBKP.LOG file in the GNR directory provides a more detailed  
report. This file contains much of the information that the CLI prints  
while the process is running. The system keeps this file with the backup  
database, regardless of how the backup is performed. The system  
keeps this file on the primary PCMCIA along with the ZIP file, if the ZIP  
file is required to be saved. The LASTBKP.LOG file can be viewed at  
the received E-mail location.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
195  
Reports  
Purpose  
This chapter describes the reports that the ICB can generate.  
The chapter contains the following sections:  
“Overview” on page 195 – introduces the types of reports the ICB  
can generate and describes where to view them.  
“Short Connection Report” on page 197 – describes the Short  
Connection Report.  
“Meetings Log Report” on page 198 – describes the Meeting  
Logs Report.  
“Overbooking Report” on page 200 – describes the Overbooking  
Report.  
“Billing Report” on page 202 – shows how the ICB handles billing  
and describes the Billing Report.  
Maintenance (Error) Report.  
Overview  
ICB can be viewed reports from the following:  
BUI – arranges report data as a table, in readable format, with  
column titles. The report can be copied to the local desktop as a raw  
format file. The report can be printed by using the browser’s print  
function.  
CLI – provides direct access to Short Connection, Meetings Log,  
and Maintenance reports.  
The ICB keeps the files for 128 days or less, depending on the definition  
of the general tab window from Microsoft Outlook.  
Note: Records related to dual-card meetings appear in the primary  
card only.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
196 Reports  
Table 52  
Table 52 describes the reports that the ICB generates.  
Report summary  
Display  
BUI  
Report  
Purpose  
Raw Format CLI  
Short Connection Detect faulty behavior  
(users are not serviced).  
not a file  
SMaint/  
SCon  
Yes  
Meetings Log  
Conference activity log.  
structured  
RGen/  
MLog  
Yes  
text (see note)  
Overbooking  
Billing  
Track actual usage of ports.  
Provide billing records.  
Logs errors.  
.CSV  
.CSV  
text  
N/A  
N/A  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Maintenance  
(Error)  
SMaint/  
MReport  
Note: Text records have a fixed length of 1024 characters, padded with trailing spaces. The first record is binary.  
BUI Report Viewer  
An administrator can view reports from the BUI. Click on View a Report  
on the ICB Dashboard to access the Report Viewer window (see Figure  
86). Follow the steps in Procedure 42 for displaying reports.  
Figure 86  
Report Viewer window  
Click here to download the entire file to your PC.  
Procedure 42  
Displaying reports  
1
2
3
Access the ICB Dashboard.  
Select Report Viewer.  
Select the report type from the pull-down menu. Choices are Meeting Log,  
Error, Overbooking, Billing, and Short Connection.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Reports 197  
4
There are two ways to select the date.  
a
Click on Previous Day or Next Day links. The requested report will be  
displayed.  
b
Click the appropriate date from the drop down boxes. Then click the  
Display Report button. The requested report will be displayed.  
5
The reports can be downloaded to the Administrator’s PC by clicking the  
Download button. The file downloads to the location defined in the local file  
selection dialog box of the Windows operating system.  
This procedure is now complete  
The following sections in this chapter show examples of the reports.  
Short Connection Report  
BUI Short Connection Report  
Figure 87 shows how the Short Connection Report looks when  
accessed from the BUI.  
Figure 87  
Short Connection Report BUI example  
The Short Connection Report always shows the current status; the date  
cannot be selected. The report displays the same text as what CLI  
displays after the SMaint/SCon/Print command. The window does not  
shows ports with all zero counters.  
The Reset Counters button sets all counters back to zero (similar to  
the CLI SMaint/SCon/Reset command).  
CLI Short Connection Report  
Use the Short Connection Report menu to present or reset the short  
connection peg-count.  
To access the Short Connection Report menu, login as an  
administrator. Enter the System Maintenance command (sm, SM, or  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
198 Reports  
SMaint) and enter the Short Connection Report command (sc, SC, or  
SCon).  
Short port occupancy can indicate a fault condition on a port or can  
indicate that a user is dialing the incorrect DN. Set the short occupancy  
range in the System Attributes Editor menu, which can range from 0 to  
30 seconds.  
From the Short Connection Report menu, the option is available to print  
(p) or reset (r) the counter to zero. When printing the short connection  
peg-count, the system presents all ports with a count in the following  
format:  
port # today’s_count total_count  
The counts have the following meanings:  
today’s count – count of short connections that occur this day.  
total count – cumulative count of all short connections since the  
ICB was last reset, or the system reset the short connection  
counters.  
If all counters are zero, the system prints the header followed by the  
message “all counters are zero”.  
Short Connection Report CLI example  
STest, MReport, SCon, ARchivdb, REstordb, CRestart, ?: sc  
Print, Reset: p  
Port #  
10  
today’s_count total_count  
2
1
5
4
18  
10  
34  
31  
Print, Reset: r  
Reset all short connection counters? (Yes, (No)) Yes  
Counters reset.  
Print, Reset: *  
STest, MReport, SCon, ARchivdb, REstordb, CRestart, ?:  
Meetings Log Report  
BUI Meetings Log Report  
The BUI sorts the Meetings Log Report by DN. The BUI displays the  
report with events grouped by meeting. Therefore, the window shows a  
“Select DN” pull-down menu to enable the selection of the particular  
DN’s records to appear in the report. Figure 88 on page 199 shows how  
the BUI displays the report, which has the same text lines that the CLI  
prints when RGen/MLog is entered. The BUI adjusts the font to make  
this report easier to read.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Reports 199  
If the report does not fit on one window, click on the Next Page button  
to display more information.  
Figure 88  
Meetings Log Report BUI example  
CLI Meetings Log Report  
The CLI Meeting Log Browser menu displays a log of conference  
events for a specified date. After the system displays data, it returns to  
the year-month-day prompt using the last selected date as default. To  
interrupt the log display, enter * and press the Enter key.  
Each event report starts with the time stamp and the main DN in the  
following format:  
hours:minutes:seconds (DN) <description of event>  
The date selected to display the conference log must be in the past.  
The system deletes old log files after exceeding the predefined report  
aging time. The system indicates if there are no log files for the  
specified date. To access the Meeting Log Browser menu, login as an  
operator or administrator. Enter the Report Generation command (rg,  
RG, or RGen) and enter the Meeting Log Browser command (ml, ML,  
or MLog).  
Meetings Log Report CLI example  
Log: ml  
year (1996): 1995  
month (02): 03  
day (20): 15  
14:55:06 (2230) opened:  
DN chair_DN #Ports  
Name_Entry  
yes  
Expansion  
no  
Assist_DN  
1000  
2230 2001  
3
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
200 Reports  
15:00:45 (2220) expanded  
15:01:00 (2220) entry: 24  
15:03:23 (2230) ch_entry: 4  
15:03:56 (2220) exit: 14  
//Conferee entered conference on port 24//  
//Chair joined conference on port 4//  
//Conferee left conference from port 14//  
//Conference locked//  
16:35:09 (2230) mmi_op lock  
16:44:15 (2220) mmi_op unlock  
16:45:00 (2220) closed  
//Conference unlocked//  
16:56:02 (2230) ch_com dial_out: 395945  
//Chair dials out DN//  
//Chair returns without called party//  
16:57:00 (2230) ch_com return  
16:58:20 (2230) ch_com redial: 395945 //Chair redialed last dialed DN//  
16:59:16 (2230) ch_com ret with_party //Chair returns with called party/  
16:58:45 (2230) ch_com count  
//Chair counts conferees//  
17:00:54 (2230) mmi_op num_of_ports: 2 //New number of ports is 2//  
17:01:44 (2230) mmi_op duration: 4:00  
17:02:54 (2230) mmi_op expansion: yes  
17:03:45 (2230) ch_com lock  
//New duration is 4 hours//  
//Port expansion is allowed//  
//Chair locks conference//  
//Chair unlocks conference//  
//Drops last dial in conferee//  
17:05:45 (2230) ch_com unlock  
17:08:26 (2230) ch_com drop last d_in  
17:08:56 (2230) ch_com drop last d_out //Drops last dial out conferee//  
17:09:16 (2230) ch_com drop all  
//Chair drops all conferees//  
Overbooking Report  
BUI Overbooking Report  
Figure 89 shows how the Overbooking Report appears when accessed  
from the BUI.  
Figure 89  
Overbooking Report BUI example  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Reports 201  
The table in the report shows the contents of the Overbooking Report  
which the BUI translates from a .CSV file. The columns in the table are  
as follows:  
Hour – The hour of the day, from 0 to 23 where:  
— 00 = 0:00 o’clock to 1:00 o’clock  
— 01 = 1:00 o’clock to 2:00 o’clock etc.  
Max Ports – The maximum ports busy, by actual calls, during this  
hour.  
Duration: min:sec – The total duration in which all ports are busy  
during this hour. When the value is greater than 0, the value in the  
“Max Ports” column shows that card’s capacity. The duration field in  
.CSV format appears as two separate columns; the BUI combines  
the columns for easy viewing.  
There is one line in the table for each hour of the day, so this window  
does not require a Next Page button.  
Overbooking Report (.CSV)  
The system generates the Overbooking Report on a daily basis. Each  
line of the over-booking report contains the following information:  
• 1st field: hour (00-23)  
• 2nd field: maximum number of ports (00-32)  
• 3rd field: duration in minutes (00-60)  
• 4th field: duration in seconds (00-59)  
The total number of lines is 26. The first line is for the date, the second  
line is for the field names, and 24 lines are for every hour as follows:  
DATE: <month name> dd yyyy,,,  
hour,max ports,duration minutes,duration seconds  
00,<max port>,<duration minutes>,<duration seconds>  
01,<max port>,<duration minutes>,<duration seconds>  
02,<max port>,<duration minutes>,<duration seconds>  
03,<max port>,<duration minutes>,<duration seconds>  
04,<max port>,<duration minutes>,<duration seconds>  
05,<max port>,<duration minutes>,<duration seconds>  
06,<max port>,<duration minutes>,<duration seconds>  
07,<max port>,<duration minutes>,<duration seconds>  
08,<max port>,<duration minutes>,<duration seconds>  
09,<max port>,<duration minutes>,<duration seconds>  
10,<max port>,<duration minutes>,<duration seconds>  
11,<max port>,<duration minutes>,<duration seconds>  
12,<max port>,<duration minutes>,<duration seconds>  
13,<max port>,<duration minutes>,<duration seconds>  
14,<max port>,<duration minutes>,<duration seconds>  
15,<max port>,<duration minutes>,<duration seconds>  
16,<max port>,<duration minutes>,<duration seconds>  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
202 Reports  
17,<max port>,<duration minutes>,<duration seconds>  
18,<max port>,<duration minutes>,<duration seconds>  
19,<max port>,<duration minutes>,<duration seconds>  
20,<max port>,<duration minutes>,<duration seconds>  
21,<max port>,<duration minutes>,<duration seconds>  
22,<max port>,<duration minutes>,<duration seconds>  
23,<max port>,<duration minutes>,<duration seconds>  
Billing Report  
Introduction  
Users can be charged for conference reservations and dial-out calls  
during a conference. The system stores billing reports in database files  
which can be retrieved from the card by FTP. Dial-out calls must be  
charged through the Meridian system billing records.  
Billing charges are based on the following:  
• The duration of the meeting, including any extension of the  
conference from either the BUI or by the chairperson using the *98  
command from the keypad.  
• The number of ports booked for the meeting. The figure includes  
any increase in the number of ports during the conference from the  
BUI or a port increase provided automatically by the ICB.  
Note: The system charges users for the number of ports booked for  
the conference. This charge does not depend on how many  
conferees participated in the meeting or the duration of each input  
call.  
BUI configuration  
The Billing Account ID for every user must be defined through the ICB  
Dashboard (see “Users List” on page 117). The Billing Account ID is the  
account number of the user, up to nine digits, for billing purposes. This  
number appears in ICB billing reports for conferences owned by the  
user.  
The following options are available for generating billing reports (see  
No billing – the system does not generate billing reports.  
Billing Reports – the system generates billing reports.  
Billing Reports & CDR – the system generates billing reports and  
Call Detail Records. This option is only available on the CS 1000.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Reports 203  
BUI Billing Report  
Figure 90 shows how the Billing Report appears when accessed from  
the BUI. The table in the window shows the contents of the Billing  
Report which the BUI translates from the .CSV file.  
Figure 90  
Billing Report BUI example  
The “Event” field values appear as code numbers in the .CSV file. In the  
BUI, the system displays them as event names.  
If the report does not fit on one window, click on the Next Page button  
to display more information.  
Billing Report (.CSV)  
The system saves ICB Billing Reports automatically in files on a daily  
basis. These files use the a:\OAM\BILLING directory on the PCMCIA  
for the period defined by the report aging feature. The default period is  
32 days.  
The file’s names consist of capital letter “B” and the date of the report  
(year, month and day) in the following format: Byyymmdd and have the  
extension CSV, where:  
yyy – indicates the year (for example, “099” for 1999, “100” for  
2000, “101” for 2001).  
mm – indicates the month  
dd – indicates the day  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
204 Reports  
For example, B0990720.CSV has the Billing Report for July 20, 1999  
and B1010203.CSV contains the Billing Report for February 03, 2001.  
Note: To retrieve billing files, transfer the files by FTP over the  
TCP/IP LAN using a fixed password.  
Each Billing Report consists of 14 fields separated by commas. Table  
53 shows the information that the Billing Report contains.  
Table 53  
Billing Report contents  
Field  
1st  
Contents  
Time stamp in hours (00-23).  
Time stamp in minutes (00-59).  
Time stamp in seconds (00-59).  
Event as follows:  
2nd  
3rd  
4th  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Meeting booked  
Meeting modified  
Meeting start  
Active meeting modified  
Meeting cancelled before being started  
Active meeting cancelled (after being started)  
Meeting schedule time has ended  
Card restart  
5th  
Card ID (up to a four-digit number).  
Meeting ID (up to a 10-digit number).  
Billing account (up to a nine-digit number).  
User ID.  
6th  
7th  
8th  
9th  
Meeting date.  
10th  
11th  
12th  
13th  
14th  
Meeting start time in hours (00-23).  
Meeting start time in minutes (00-59).  
Meeting start time in seconds (00-59).  
Duration in hours (01-12).  
Duration in minutes (00-59).  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reports 205  
Table 53  
Billing Report contents (Continued)  
Field  
15th  
16th  
Contents  
Ports scheduled (02-40).  
Ports used (02-40).  
Note: For a permanent bridge the meeting date, start time, and  
duration fields are irrelevant and always appear as zero. The first line  
is for the date, the second line is for the field names, and all other  
lines are for the events.  
The daily billing report format is as follows:  
DATE: <month name> dd yyyy,,,,,,,,,,,,,  
<1st field name>, <2nd field name>,.....,<14th field name>  
<1st field>,<2nd field>,....,<14th field>  
<1st field>,<2nd field>,....,<14th field>  
<1st field>,<2nd field>,....,<14th field>  
<1st field>,<2nd field>,....,<14th field>  
BIlling Report .CSV example  
In this example, the meeting ID is 32, user billing account is 999, and  
card ID is 7.  
First line – at 8am meeting has been booked to start on Aug 8 1998 at 10:30am,  
duration of 02:15, 6 ports.  
Second line – at 9am meeting modified to 8 ports.  
Third line – at 10.28am meeting started.  
Fourth line – at 11am active meeting modified to 3 hours duration.  
Fifth line – at 01:28pm meeting ended (time has ended).  
Sixth line – at 04:00pm card restarted.  
DATE: Aug 7 1998  
time stamp hours, time stamp minutes, time stamp seconds, event, card ID,  
meeting ID, billing account, date, start time hours, start time minutes, start time  
seconds, duration hours, duration minutes, ports  
08,00,00,01,7,32,999,Aug 8 1998,10,30,00,02,15,06  
09,00,00,02,7,32,999,Aug 8 1998,10,30,00,02,15,08  
10,28,00,03,7,32,999,Aug 8 1998,10,30,00,02,15,08  
11,00,00,04,7,32,999,03,00,08  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
206 Reports  
A billing file includes the following records:  
• Date stamp, for example: DATE: Aug 7 1998  
• Header: time stamp hours, time stamp minutes, time stamp  
seconds, event, card ID, meeting ID, billing account, date, start time  
hours, start time minutes, start time seconds, duration hours,  
duration minutes, and ports  
• Billing event record  
Table 54 shows example billing records for all events. The card ID is  
1234 and the user’s billing account is 999.  
Table 54  
Event examples  
Example  
Description  
Meeting Booked – In this example, the time stamp, card ID, meeting ID, billing account, user ID, start  
time, duration, and ports information was available.  
08,00,00,01,1234,7,999,Barry,Aug 8  
2004,10,30,00,02,15,06  
This record indicates that the meeting has been  
booked at 8 am, the user’s name is Barry, to start  
on August 8, 2004 at 10:30 am, duration 2 hours  
15 minutes, with 6 ports.  
Meeting Modified – In this example, the time stamp, card ID, meeting ID, billing account, user ID, start  
time, duration, and ports information was available.  
09,00,00,02,1234,7,999,Barry,Aug 8  
2004,10,30,00,02,15,08  
This record indicates that a BUI user (Barry)  
changed the meeting to include eight ports at 9  
am, before the meeting began.  
Meeting Started – In this example, the time stamp, card ID, meeting ID, billing account, user ID, start  
time, duration, and ports information was available.  
10,28,00,03,1234,7,999,Barry,Aug 8  
2004,10,30,00,02,15,08  
This record indicates that the meeting started at  
10:28 am.  
Note: The meeting’s start time is 10:28 am and not  
10:30 am as scheduled. Meetings always start two  
minutes before the scheduled start time to guarantee  
timely entry of users.  
Active Meeting Modified – In this example, the time stamp, card ID, meeting ID, billing account, user  
ID, duration, and ports information was available.  
11,00,00,04,1234,7,999,Barry,03,00,08  
This record indicates that at 11 am a user (Barry)  
expanded the duration of the active meeting to  
three hours. The original duration was 2 hours 15  
minutes.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reports 207  
Table 54  
Event examples (Continued)  
Example  
Description  
Meeting Ended – In these examples, the time stamp, card ID, meeting ID, billing account information,  
and user ID was available. Examples report this event for three different cases:  
The meeting was cancelled before it began.  
10,05,00,05,1234,7,999,Barry,06,00  
This record indicates that a user (Barry) cancelled  
the meeting reservation at 10:05 am from the BUI,  
before the scheduled start time. There were 6  
ports booked for this meeting. The number of  
used ports is 0, because none of participants  
entered the meeting.  
The active meeting was cancelled after it began. This record indicates that the meeting ended at  
12:48 pm from the BUI, before the scheduled  
meeting time elapsed. There were 6 ports booked  
12,48,00,06,1234,7,999,Barry,06,05  
for this meeting. The next number (5) shows how  
many participants entered the conference. This  
number can be greater than the number of ports  
booked for the meeting, because the meeting  
person booking the meeting enabled the option  
for expansion.  
The meeting’s scheduled time elapsed.  
13,28,00,07,1234,7,999,Barry,10,12  
This record indicates that the meeting ended at  
01:28 pm, because the scheduled time elapsed.  
There were 10 ports booked for this meeting. The  
next number (12) shows how many participants  
entered the conference. This number is greater  
than the number of ports booked for the meeting,  
because of expansion during the meeting.  
Card Restarted – In this example, the time stamp, and card ID information was available.  
16,08,30,08,1234,  
This record indicates that there was a card restart  
at 16:08:30. The event ID appears in bold letters.  
1234 is the card’s ID, 7 is the meeting’s ID, and  
999 is the customer’s billing ID.  
CS 1000 Call Detail Recording  
The Call Detail Recording (CDR) feature enables the ICB to charge  
users for out-going calls based on CDR reports the CS 1000 system  
generates. The reports are generated even if the call is unanswered.  
The CS 1000 must have the following software packages: Call Detail  
Recording (CDR) package 4; and CDR with Charge Account (CHG)  
package 23.  
Note: CDR is not available on the CS 2100/Meridian SL-100.  
To enable the CDR feature, select “Billing and CDR Reports” from the  
Billing options pull-down menu in the ICB Dashboard – General  
Settings window (see Figure 53 on page 108).  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
208 Reports  
Charge Account feature  
To define the CDR with Charge Account feature, refer to CS 1000 Call  
Detail Recording and CS 1000 Features and Services.  
When a user dials out with the Billing and CDR Reports option selected,  
the ICB card takes the Charge Account key (consisting of the first eight  
digits of the user’s account ID), the call ID, and the meeting ID from the  
charge account field for the CDR record.  
The Charge Account key  
In the CS 1000, the Charge Account key for every port of the ICB card  
must be defined in LD 11 (see Table 55 for an example).  
Table 55  
LD 11 – Define the Charge Account key for an ICB port  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
chg  
TYPE  
TYPE  
TN  
4 0 2 0  
2616  
4 0 2 0  
yes  
ECHG  
ITEM  
key 9 chg  
CDR record format  
CDR records are printed on CS 1000 system TTY terminal defined as  
a CDR user. When defining the CDR with Charge Account feature, the  
Charge Account data is included in CDR records for each ICB outgoing  
call, as in the following examples:  
1. The following record appears on CDR TTY as outgoing call is started:  
C 040 00 5211 T095019 1203 11.25 00000099912340000000007  
&
0000 0000  
where:  
first 9 digits: 000000999 is the billing account,  
next 4 digits: 1234 is the card ID,  
next 10 digits: 0000000007 is the meeting ID.  
2. The following record appears on CDR TTY as outgoing call is ended:  
N 041 00 5211 T095019 1203 11.47 00:22:08 A 333  
&
0000 0000  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reports 209  
CDR example scenarios  
The conference call was booked using the BUI by a user whose billing  
account is 9134513, on July 19, 1999 at 06:15 p.m., for July 20, 1999  
from 08:00 a.m. to 09:00 a.m. The number of ports booked is six.  
The conference call was started as scheduled on July 20, 1999 two  
minutes before 08:30 a.m. During the call at 08:36 a.m. (after eight  
minutes), the chairperson calls out once to a long distance number and  
brings a user into the call. After 47 minutes the dialed out person drops  
off. No record is stored in the ICB card in relation to this event.The  
following record appears in the CS 1000 CDR:  
C 040 00 5211 T095019 20/07 08:36 00913451312340000000007  
& 0000 0000  
N 041 00 5211 T095019 20/07 09:23 00:47:08 A 333  
& 0000 0000  
At 08:55 a.m. the chairperson calls out to a long distance number and  
after two minutes returns to the meeting without the dialed party. The  
following record appears in the CS 1000 CDR:  
C 040 00 5215 T095019 20/07 08:55 00913451312340000000007  
& 0000 0000  
N 041 00 5215 T095019 20/07 08:57 00:02:12 A 333|  
& 0000 0000  
Maintenance (Error) Report  
BUI Maintenance (Error) Report  
Figure 91 shows how the BUI Maintenance Report.  
Figure 91  
Maintenance (Error) Report BUI example  
report to your computer  
No. Severity Err code Timestamp Message  
BBF_GetConfigVar: failed fs_open_f for filename: a:user\schedule.ini,rc = 200b  
Time and Date update - OLD: 13-10-2001 22:46:54 NEW: 13-10-2001 22:45:54  
BBF_GetConfigVar: failed fs_open_f for filename: a:user\schedule.ini,rc = 200b  
BBF_GetConfigVar: failed fs_open_f for filename: a:user\schedule.ini,rc = 200b  
Midnight re-scheduling  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
0005  
0006  
10:00:03  
10:22:43  
11:30:08  
12:15:00  
12:43:20  
14:01:22  
BBF050  
PH603  
Minor  
Info  
BBF050  
BBF050  
PH000  
Minor  
Minor  
Info  
BBF_GetConfigVar: failed fs_open_f for filename: a:user\schedule.ini,rc = 200b  
BBF050  
Minor  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
210 Reports  
The Maintenance (Error) Report appears in the table in this window.  
The window shows the same text lines as those generated by the CLI  
SMaint/MReport command.  
If the report does not fit on one window, click on the Next Page button  
to display more information.  
For more information about how the ICB handles error reporting, see  
CLI Maintenance (Error) Report  
The Maintenance Report Browser menu enables maintenance reports  
to be displayed according to date. These reports analyze system  
problems based on error messages compiled on that date. To access  
the Maintenance Report Browser menu, login as the administrator.  
Enter the System Maintenance command (sm, SM, or SMaint) and  
enter the Maintenance Report Browser command (mr, MR, or  
MReport).  
All reports are time stamped and contain information about the cause  
of the problem. After the system displays the data, it returns to the  
“year-month-day” prompt using the last selected date as default.  
The selected date must be in the past. The system discards old files  
that exceed the report aging number of days. If the date entered is too  
old, an error message appears. If the date is within the correct date  
range, but there are no report entries for that day, a message indicating  
there are no messages appears. To interrupt the report display, enter *  
and press the Enter key.  
The maintenance reports have the following format:  
<serial number>: <MON_REPORT_ID> <channel #> <time>  
<Applic_Manager_cycle> <Message Body>  
Maintenance Report (Error) CLI example  
The following example displays the maintenance report for March 15,  
1996:  
STest, MReport, SCon, ARchivdb, REstordb, CRestart, ?: mr  
year(1996): 1996  
month (11): 03  
day (22): 15  
1234:timer101 ch01 16:16:18:111 9000 “Num: 100 Timing Stop. 00.”  
1235: sig100 ch00 16:17:05:234 9900 “SIG: Q_APP in msg:0000005A”  
0001:HW PCMCIA001 ln0077 ch01 16:25:29:836 PCMCIA card  
inserted in socket 1  
year (1996): .  
STest, MReport, SCon, ARchivdb, REstordb, CRestart, ?:  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
211  
Upgrades  
Purpose  
This chapter provides procedures for upgrading your system to ICB  
Release 4 from previous releases and for upgrading sub-issues of ICB  
Release 4. The chapter contains the following sections:  
“Overview” on page 211 – introduces the ICB upgrade strategy.  
“Planning for an upgrade” on page 214 – provides information to  
help prepare for an upgrade.  
“Upgrade procedures” on page 215 – provides system upgrade  
procedures.  
Overview  
The ICB Release 4 can be upgraded from MICB Release 2 and MICB  
Release 3, but not from MICB Release 1. A new board and a new flash  
card are provided when upgrading. The vintage BC and flash card are  
replaced in upgrading. The dongle remains. Upgrades cannot be  
completed over the web. A new keycode is required when upgrading.  
Table 56 shows the upgrade paths regarding the conversion of  
hardware and customer data.  
Table 56  
ICB upgrade paths  
From ...  
To ...  
Card  
Firmware  
Card  
Firmware  
Data conversion  
MICB Release 1  
MICB Release 1  
NT5D51AA  
NT5D51AB  
ICB Release 4  
ICB Release 4  
NT5D51BC  
NT5D51BC  
NT5D51BC  
NT5D51BC  
No  
No  
MICB Release 2  
MICB Release 2  
NT5D51AB  
NT5D51AB  
ICB Release 4  
ICB Release 4  
Yes  
Yes  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
212 Upgrades  
Table 56  
ICB upgrade paths (Continued)  
From ...  
To ...  
Card  
Firmware  
Card  
Firmware  
Data conversion  
MICB Release 3  
NT5D51AC  
ICB Release 4  
Yes  
NT5D51BC  
NT5D51BC  
ICB Release 4  
NT5D51AC  
ICB Release 4  
Yes  
Note: There is an upgrade from MICB Release 1 to ICB Release 4  
but data conversion is not supported. This is the same as a new  
installation.  
Insert a PCMCIA card into the top PCMCIA slot accessible through the  
ICB faceplate for external memory expansion, new voice  
announcements, and firmware upgrades. The available storage for  
voice prompts on the PCMCIA disk is 130 Mbytes, providing 260  
minutes of voice recording. The ICB uses the PCMCIA ATA, Type II and  
Type III Flash cards for ICB software upgrade and backup.  
The ICB card has two PCMCIA sockets. PCMCIA hard drive cards store  
ICB voice prompts and firmware code. The ICB ships with the PCMCIA  
hard drive. The bottom socket houses the PCMCIA hard drive card that  
contains the current firmware and customer data. Use the top socket to  
upgrade the firmware. Figure 92 on page 213 shows how to load  
PCMCIA cards into the ICB faceplate slots to upgrade the ICB capacity.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrades 213  
Figure 92  
Installing a PCMCIA card into the ICB faceplate slot  
ICB  
Only install this  
PCMCIA card  
when you have  
to upgrade firmware.  
lication  
ICB  
y Card  
II  
ype  
ICB App  
PCMCIA T  
Flash Memor  
This PCMCIA card  
stores voice prompts  
and firmware code.  
It is normally installed  
in the ICB card.  
e
iv  
ICB  
III  
Hard Dr  
ype  
PCMCIA T  
G100011  
Keycode security  
A keycode protects against unauthorized ICB feature use. The keycode  
restricts upgrades of either the number of ports or application software  
to a given ICB card. Nortel Networks tracks the keycodes to allow for  
accurate handling of field repairs and incremental upgrades.  
Keycodes are required for the following upgrades:  
• feature enhancements  
• new applications  
• port additions  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
214 Upgrades  
Keycodes are not required for the following:  
• backup and restore operations  
• application patching/bug fix  
Nortel Networks provides the customer with a keycode to enable  
installation of any required upgrade. Enter the keycode using the  
Command Line Interface from the local maintenance port on the ICB  
card. The keycode is 24 characters long; enter it in three sets of eight  
digits each called keycode1, keycode2, and keycode3.  
Planning for an upgrade  
When preparing for an upgrade, consider the following items:  
• Always back up the site data, before beginning an upgrade.  
• Upgrades from any release require new hardware.  
• When adding the Microsoft Outlook GUI functionality, the ICB  
Administrator must coordinate with the Microsoft Outlook  
Administrator. Also, the user community needs to be informed.  
Managing the user community during an upgrade  
An important part of planning an upgrade is managing the user  
community. Table 57 lists items that will impact the user community  
during an upgrade to ICB Release 4.  
Table 57  
User community upgrade considerations  
Item  
Description  
BUI access  
Users need to know how to reset their browser to access the ICB and  
when to do that. This is required because the address they previously  
used in the browser to access ICB had an extension of ICB.htm. Users  
need to remove the extension.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Upgrades 215  
Table 57  
User community upgrade considerations (Continued)  
Item  
Description  
User training  
Provide users with the ICB Release 4 User Guide and information about  
the following:  
Custom greeting.  
How to access and use chairperson control.  
How to delegate chairperson control (that is, acquire and release  
chairperson control).  
Volume control. How to use the feature from the TUI or the BUI  
control screen.  
If single DN access is to be implemented, the changes to existing  
conferences (that is, already booked) and future meetings need to be  
communicated to the users.  
Microsoft Outlook  
E-Mail format  
Changes to the E-Mail format should be reviewed and made visible to  
people who will be creating meetings.  
Upgrade procedures  
MICB Release 2 or MICB Release 3 card upgrade  
Use Procedure 43 to upgrade your ICB card from Release 2 or Release 3.  
Procedure 43  
MICB Release 2 or MICB Release 3 card upgrade  
1
Disable the operational MICB Release 2 or MICB Release 3 card using LD  
32.  
Note: CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 customers must Bsy the ICB card at the PM level,  
before starting the procedure and RTS the card once the upgrade is complete.  
2
3
Pull the MICB Release 2 or MICB Release 3 card out from the slot.  
Remove the MICB Release 2 or MICB Release 3 PCMCIA from the lower  
socket.  
4
5
Insert a new ICB Release 4 PCMCIA in the lower socket of the new ICB  
Release 4 card (vintage BC). This PCMCIA should be as shipped from the  
factory, with no customer data on it.  
Remove the security device from the old card and move it to the new ICB  
Release 4 card.  
6
7
Insert the new ICB Release 4 (vintage BC) into the slot.  
Enter the new keycode.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
216 Upgrades  
8
When the card is activated as ICB Release 4, enter the CLI and login as an  
administrator. Enter:  
name: admin  
Password: <CR>  
Where CR is an empty password.  
9
Insert the old MICB Release 2 or MICB Release 3 PCMCIA in the upper  
socket.  
10  
From the CLI enter:  
SMaint and then convert  
The ICB copies the data from the upper PCMCIA, converts to ICB Release 4  
format, and stores it in the lower PCMCIA.  
Note: If the conversion is done from a dual MICB Release 2 (which uses  
a PC server), the system does not copy “administrator” users. Instead the  
system creates one default administrator, “admin” with a password of  
“000000”.  
11  
Remove the MICB Release 2 or MICB Release 3 PCMCIA from the upper  
socket. Nortel Networks recommends that you keep it, in case the customer  
wants to revert back to MICB Release 2 or MICB Release 3.  
12  
13  
You can now enter the administration BUI to review or modify parameters and  
options.  
Enable the card in LD 32.  
This procedure is now complete  
Port Upgrade  
The ICB card can be configured to have port sizes ranging from 12 to  
62; however, systems requiring more than 32 ports require a dual-card  
configuration. To activate a different number of ports than currently  
active, login to the BUI as an administrator. Keycodes are required.  
Under the Upgrades section of the ICB Dashboard click on the Number  
of Ports link (see Figure 93 on page 217).  
Note: The CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 only supports 32- and 64-port  
ICB cards. This procedure is not supported for CS 2100/Meridian  
SL-100 customers.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Upgrades 217  
Figure 93  
ICB Dashboard – Card Upgrade window  
A ports upgrade is purchased from Nortel Networks, it comes with a  
new keycode for the card. Follow the steps in Procedure 44 to perform  
the port upgrade.  
Procedure 44  
Upgrade ports from the administrator’s ICB Dashboard  
1
2
From the pull-down menu, select the new number of ports in the combo-box.  
The current number of ports appears as view-only above this box.  
Enter the keycode. The keycode is 24 digits. To simplify input, the system  
divides the keycode into three sets of eight digits each.  
The system displays the input characters as they are entered.  
3
Click on the Submit button.  
The system submits the change only if the keycode entry is correct. If the  
entry is incorrect, the following message appears: “Keycode is incorrect!  
Re-enter the keycode.”  
Before clicking on the Submit button, operation can be cancelled by clicking  
on the Dashboard button on top of the window.  
Note: Ports must be configured in the switch in order for them to be operational.  
This procedure is now complete  
Firmware Upgrade  
Upgrade the ICB Release 4 firmware from the following two sources:  
• the secondary PCMCIA device  
• a remote FTP server  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
218 Upgrades  
Use a BUI administration window for the upgrade process, which  
supports both options (see Figure 94). The CLI can also be used.  
Follow the steps in Procedure 45 to upgrade the ICB firmware version.  
Procedure 45 Upgrade the ICB firmware version  
1
Log into the BUI.  
2
Click Upgrade the Firmware Version in the Dashboard. The Firmware  
Upgrade window opens. See Figure 94 for a depiction.  
Figure 94  
ICB Dashboard – FIrmware Upgrade window  
3
4
Select the source of the new firmware version. If the source is an FTP server,  
specify the IP address, path, login user name, and password.  
Click Upgrade & Restart.  
This procedure is now complete  
After upgrading the firmware, you must publish the new upgraded ICB  
form that comes with the firmware. See Procedure 34, “Upgrading the  
The top-right corner of the Firmware Upgrade window shows the  
current hardware and firmware versions. The firmware version takes  
the form of “4.xx”, where 4 is the ICB release and xx is the firmware  
version number.  
The first step is to specify the upgrade source by clicking on one of the  
radio buttons. Depending on the source selected, the following  
procedures describe how to perform the firmware upgrade.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Upgrades 219  
Procedure 46  
Firmware upgrade from ICB card upper socket  
1
2
3
Click on the secondary PCMCIA device radio button.  
Insert the PCMCIA disk in the upper socket of the ICB card.  
Click on the Upgrade & Restart button.  
The ICB copies the files from the upper socket and performs a restart. When  
the restart is complete, the current BUI session is lost. Login again as an  
administrator. When returning to this window, the new firmware version  
should appear in the top-right corner of the window.  
This procedure is now complete  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
220 Upgrades  
Procedure 47  
Firmware upgrade using FTP  
1
Click on the FTP Server radio button.  
2
Enter the FTP parameters in the fields the window provides as follows:  
a
b
IP address – the remote FTP server where the upgrade files are stored.  
Path to file – path of the folder on the computer where the upgrade files  
are stored (for example, c:\ICB\4_01).  
c
d
Login – login name for FTP.  
Password – password for FTP login.  
3
4
Click on the Get Files button to start the FTP transfer session.  
After the previous steps finishes, click on the Upgrade & Restart button.  
The ICB copies the files from the FTP server and performs a restart. When  
the restart is complete, the current BUI session is lost. Login again as an  
administrator. When returning to this window, the new firmware version  
should appear in the top-right corner of the window.  
This procedure is now complete  
Upgrade to the single DN access method  
Follow the steps in Procedure 48 to upgrade an existing MICB Release  
2 or MICB Release 3 card to ICB Release 4 configured with single DN  
access.  
Procedure 48  
Upgrade to single DN access  
1
2
Follow Procedure 43 on page 215 to upgrade an MICB Release 2 or MICB  
Release 3 card to an ICB Release 4 card.  
Configure the DNs.  
a
Remove the DN pairs from the switch datafill. For more information, if  
your system is a Meridian 1 or CS 1000, see “Assign ACD DNs” on  
page 48; if your system is a CS 2100 or Meridian SL-100 see  
Note: DN pairs can be left in the ICB. Callers to existing conferences  
configured with direct access DNs will be requested to enter the access DN to  
reach the meeting.  
b
Configure the single access DN in the switch. For more information, if  
your system is a Meridian 1 or CS 1000, see “Assign ACD DNs” on  
page 48; if your system is a CS 2100 or Meridian SL-100 see  
Note: This DN should be forwarded to the ICB card main ACD DN.  
3
Access the ICB Installation Wizard and perform the following (see “Step 2 –  
a
b
Click on the first radio button for the single DN access method.  
Enter the new single-access DN.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Upgrades 221  
c
Click on the Submit & Continue button.  
The new single DN access method now applies.  
4
Instruct users to dial the single DN for future conferences.  
Note: Make sure the notification e-mail content is still valid.  
This procedure is now complete  
Upgrade from a stand-alone to a dual-card ICB  
This section describes how to upgrade an ICB Release 4 card  
operating as a stand-alone ICB to be either the primary or secondary  
card in a dual-card configuration.  
The main issue to consider is the DN pairs: a single card can have up  
to 10 DN pairs, whereas a dual card can have only nine DN pairs, plus  
the dual-card meetings DN.  
When upgrading or configuring a dual-card ICB Release 4  
configuration, the secondary card must be configured before the  
primary card. Therefore, Procedure 49 must be performed before  
Procedure 49  
Stand-alone card to secondary card  
1
2
Access the ICB Installation Wizard: Step 1 – Basic Card Settings window (see  
“Step 1 – Basic Card Settings” on page 73). In the “Type” field, select the  
radio button “Dual Card – Secondary.”  
Click the Submit & Continue button.  
If 10 DN pairs are configured, the system deletes one automatically. The ICB  
first attempts to delete a DN pair that has no conferences scheduled against  
it. If no such DN pair is found, the ICB deletes the DN pair with the least  
number of conferences using it. All associated conferences are deleted.  
Note: A DN pair used by a permanent conference is not deleted.  
If a DN pair is deleted in direct-access dialing mode, a pop-up message  
appears. Note the deleted DN pair, as it can be removed from the Meridian  
switch configuration.  
3
The system displays Step 2 of the Installation Wizard (see “Step 2 – Access  
Numbers” on page 76). If the automatic change, as described above, took  
place, this is reflected in the DN table. If the direct access dialing mode is  
used, only nine DNs appear.  
4
5
Click the Submit & Continue button. The system saves the change and the  
screen returns to the ICB Dashboard.  
Logout of this card and proceed to the primary ICB configuration.  
This procedure is now complete  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
222 Upgrades  
Procedure 50  
Stand-alone card to primary card  
1
Access the ICB Installation Wizard: Step 1 – Basic Card Settings window (see  
“Step 1 – Basic Card Settings” on page 73). In the “Type” field, select the  
radio button “Dual Card – Primary.”  
2
Click the Submit & Continue button.  
If 10 DN pairs are configured, the system deletes one automatically. The ICB  
first attempts to delete a DN pair that has no conferences scheduled against  
it. If no such DN pair is found, the ICB deletes the DN pair with the least  
number of conferences using it. All associated conferences are deleted.  
Note: A DN pair used by a permanent conference is not deleted.  
If a DN pair is deleted in direct-access dialing mode, a pop-up message  
appears. Note the deleted DN pair, as it can be removed from the Meridian  
switch configuration.  
3
The system displays Step 2 of the Installation Wizard (see “Step 2 – Access  
Numbers” on page 76). If the automatic change, as described above, took  
place, this is reflected in the DN table. If the direct access dialing mode is  
used, only nine DNs appear.  
4
5
Click the Submit & Continue button.  
The system displays Step 4 of the Installation Wizard (see “Step 4 – Dual  
If a DN pair was automatically deleted as described above, it appears in the  
fields “Conference access number” and “Chairperson number in primary  
card.” You can change these numbers; they must be configured in the  
Meridian switch as well.  
Fill in all the fields as described in the installation instructions, and click the  
Finish button.  
6
Logout of this card and proceed with the Meridian switch configuration  
change (see Procedure 51).  
This procedure is now complete  
Procedure 51  
Meridian switch configuration changes  
1
2
If a DN pair was deleted from the secondary or primary card, delete it from  
the switch datafill.  
Configure the DNs defined in the Installation Wizard Step 4 window of the  
primary ICB. Define them as described in the dual-card ICB installation  
instructions (for the Meridian 1 or CS 1000 see “Configure DNs for a  
dual-card conference” on page 52; for the CS 2100 or Meridian SL-100 see  
This procedure is now complete  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
223  
Appendix A: Password security  
Purpose  
This chapter describes ICB Release 4 password protection and access  
restrictions.  
The chapter contains the following sections:  
“Access permissions” on page 224 – lists the security options  
available with the ICB Release 4 system.  
how the ICB handles unsuccessful logins.  
the default login names and passwords, and their parameters  
“Reset passwords” on page 227 – provides procedures for  
resetting passwords.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
224 Appendix A: Password security  
Access permissions  
ICB Release 4 provides strict password protections and other  
mechanisms to restrict access from unauthorized personnel (see Table  
58).  
Table 58  
Access permissions  
Access type  
Description of permissions  
BUI  
(HTTP server  
web access)  
1
2
Login name and password. The login name is a combination of letters and digits  
up to 10 characters in length. The password consists of digits only. Define the  
length according to the parameter “minimum password length”. Users and  
administrators can change their passwords at any time.  
The system does not permit multiple, simultaneous BUI sessions for the same  
user. When a user logs into the BUI, no one else can login with the same user  
ID, until the session terminates (that is, the user logs out).  
The system permits only one administration session at a time. Therefore, if  
there is an active administrator session, the system does not permit another  
administrator log in.  
3
4
You can access only the initial login window when you enter the BUI’s URL from  
your web browser. You cannot access any other page or file directly.  
The system times out and closes the session after a period of inactivity. The  
administrator defines the time-out parameter.  
CLI  
1
There are two login levels. Each level has a login name and password, both of  
which are changeable through the CLI. The name and password can contain  
letters and digits.  
(direct  
connection)  
2
3
The CLI does not print the password when it is being entered.  
The system records every successful login as an information message in the  
error log.  
4
5
Upon a successful login, the CLI prints the login date and time.  
The system times out and closes the session after a period of inactivity. The  
administrator defines the time-out parameter.  
Telnet  
(server access)  
1
Remote access using telnet requires a dedicated login name and password.  
Successful login provides access to the CLI, which, in turn, requires its own  
access and login as described above. The name and password can contain  
letters and digits.  
2
3
The system records every successful login as an informational message in the  
error log. The CLI terminal prints this message.  
The system times out and closes the session after a period of inactivity. The  
administrator defines the time-out parameter.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix A: Password security 225  
Table 58  
Access permissions (Continued)  
Access type  
Description of permissions  
FTP  
(server access)  
1
2
3
Remote access using FTP requires a dedicated login name and password. The  
name and password can contain letters and digits.  
The system records every successful login as an informational message in the  
error log. The CLI terminal prints this message.  
The system times out and closes the session after a period of inactivity. The  
administrator defines the time-out parameter.  
General  
1
2
The system always encrypts files containing passwords.  
An administrator defines the minimum length of the login name and password.  
The system enforces the minimum requirement when a user changes their  
login name or password. This rule applies to all the passwords that this table  
describes. It does not apply to the conference and chairperson passwords set  
up in the BUI scheduling window.  
3
4
The maximum password length is 16 characters, which is hard-coded.  
The IP/LAN connectivity provides access through the LAN using HTTP, Telnet  
and FTP only.  
Unsuccessful login attempt handling  
Procedure 52 shows how the system handles unsuccessful login  
attempts.  
Procedure 52  
Unsuccessful login operation  
1
2
No action is required for this procedure. However, observe the activities in the  
following steps and report any system discrepancies to your support  
technician.  
For each faulty login, the system issues a message in the error log and the  
CLI. This applies to all access types: BUI; TUI; CLI; and Telnet. The following  
is an example of the message format (for more information on error  
0024: WARNING MNGMMI114 12-06 15:42:55:612 FTP login FAILED from  
152.217.111.234  
3
The ICB counts consecutive login attempts. When the count reaches the  
“maximum faulty login attempts” parameter set by the administrator, the  
system performs the following:  
a
BUI user and administrator access – After five consecutive faulty login  
attempts in which the login name is correct, but the password is wrong,  
the system blocks this login name. The administrator must reset the  
name to resume normal login operation.  
b
CLI access – After the maximum allowed login attempts, the system  
blocks the CLI for a period of time. The administrator can define the  
blocking time period.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
226 Appendix A: Password security  
c
Telnet access – After the maximum allowed login attempts, the system  
closes the connection. An administrator can define the “new connection  
refused” time period.  
d
TUI access – After three unsuccessful login attempts, the system  
disconnects the call.  
This procedure is now complete  
Password parameters summary  
Table 59 shows the ICB Release 4 default login names and passwords.  
Table 59  
Default login names and passwords  
Access type  
Default login name  
No default  
Default password  
000000  
User BUI login (multiple users)  
Administration BUI login (multiple  
administrators)  
No default (see Note 1)  
000000  
TUI login (multiple users)  
CLI first level  
CLI second level  
Telnet  
No default  
admin  
Equal to BUI password  
(see Note 2)  
debug  
MICB  
admin  
admin  
FTP  
MICB  
Note 1: Initially, one administrator account exists: “admin”.  
Note 2: The CLI’s default passwords are empty (that is, no password).  
Table 60 summarizes the security parameters and their defaults.  
Table 60  
Security parameters summary  
Parameter  
Range  
Default value  
Minimum login name length  
Minimum password length  
Maximum password length  
CLI maximum unsuccessful login attempts  
4-10  
4
1-16  
4
Hard-coded  
1-10  
16  
5
CLI blocking period after “Maximum  
unsuccessful login” is exceeded  
1-1440 seconds  
0
CLI inactivity time-out  
1-1440 minutes  
15  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix A: Password security 227  
Table 60  
Security parameters summary (Continued)  
Parameter  
Range  
1-1440 seconds  
Default value  
Telnet blocking period after “maximum  
unsuccessful login:” is exceeded  
20  
Telnet maximum unsuccessful login attempts  
Telnet inactivity time-out  
1-10  
5
1-1440 minutes  
1-1440 minutes  
1-1440 minutes  
15  
15  
30  
FTP inactivity time-out  
BUI inactivity time-out  
Reset passwords  
Follow the steps in Procedure 53 when a user forgets their password.  
Procedure 53  
Reset forgotten passwords  
1
2
The administrator can reset any BUI password through the user management  
BUI. One administrator can also reset another administrator’s password.  
When an administrator forget’s their BUI password, and there is no other  
administrator, the password can be reset from the CLI by entering the  
following command:  
PAdmin/ABreset (or abbreviated pa/ab)  
The system resets all administrator passwords, if more than one exist.  
3
4
When system passwords are forgotten (that is, Telnet, FTP, and CLI first  
level), the passwords can be viewed from the second level of the CLI.  
When the second level CLI password is forgotten, perform the following  
steps.  
a
Connect a CRT (or terminal emulation on a PC) directly to the back of the  
card’s serial port.  
b
Perform a manual power-up as follows:  
i
Pull the card out of the slot.  
ii Plug the card back into the shelf.  
The ICB starts the power-up process.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
228 Appendix A: Password security  
c
Wait for the following banner to appear:  
********************************************  
************************  
*
Running MAIN CODE!!!  
*
d
Enter the token default. This token must be entered within 15 seconds of  
the banner’s appearance.  
The restart process continues and more lines of text may appear.  
e
f
When the power-up process completes and the CLI is ready for input,  
enter the factory-default second level password (that is, login = debug;  
password = no password).  
Access the password editing command to display or modify the CLI name  
and password (see Procedure 54).  
After logging out from the CLI, normal login resumes.  
This procedure is now complete  
Follow the steps in Procedure 54 to edit or view a password from the  
second level of the CLI.  
Procedure 54  
Use the second-level CLI edit password command  
1
2
Enter the second-level login name and password.  
Enter PA Admin (or pa).  
The CLI displays a list of available commands.  
3
Enter the following command:  
PSweditor (or ps).  
The ICB displays passwords and related parameters and prompts for values.  
The system groups the parameters by sections, to allow faster steps. The  
sections are: [MIN_LENGTH], [CLI], [TELNET], [FTP], and [BUI}.  
This procedure is now complete  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix A: Password security 229  
CLI Password Editor editing session  
The following is a example of using a CLI password editing session to  
change an FTP password. Table 61 shows the font conventions that the  
example uses.  
Table 61  
Password example font conventions  
Font  
Description  
Mono  
Bold  
Prompts of text displayed by the CLI.  
User input.  
// Italics  
Explanations and comments.  
Values in the examples are not necessarily the defaults.  
CLI change to FTP Password example  
ps  
// Administrator entered PSweditor  
// ICB displays section name and its parameters, and prompts for action:  
section [MIN_LENGTH]  
MIN_NAME_LENGTH: 4  
MIN_PASSWORD_LENGTH: 8  
Modify, Next section, Cancel:  
// Actions description:  
// Modify - modify this section; MICB prompts values one by one  
// Save - save pending changes and continue to next section  
// Next - continue to next section  
// Cancel - discard all pending changes and exit the command  
n
// ‘next’ action selected  
// MICB displays section name and its parameters, and prompts for action:  
section [CLI]  
1st level user name: admin  
1st level password:  
2nd level user name: debug  
2nd level password:  
Maximum allowed login attempts: 5  
Blocking period (minutes) after login failures: 60  
CLI idle timeout in minutes: 30  
Modify, Next section, Cancel:  
n
// next: go to next section  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
230 Appendix A: Password security  
section [TELNET]  
Telnet user name: micbtln  
Telnet password: xyzu1234  
Maximum allowed Telnet login attempts: 3  
Blocking period (minutes) after login failures: 60  
Telnet idle timeout in minutes: 20  
Modify, Next section, Cancel:  
n
// next: go to next section  
section [FTP]  
FTP user name: micbftp3  
FTP password: abcd1234  
FTP idle timeout in minutes: 5  
Modify, Next section, Cancel:  
m
// modify this section  
section [FTP]  
FTP user name: micbftp3 (4-30 chars): <cr> // empty input  
FTP password: abcd1234 (8-30 chars): efgh5678 // new pswd  
FTP idle timeout in minutes: 5 (1..1440): <cr>  
// Section is re-displayed with modified values for confirmation (not saved yet)  
section [FTP]  
FTP user name: micbftp3  
FTP password: efgh5678  
FTP idle timeout in seconds: 900  
Modify, Save, Next (section), Cancel: // re-prompt for action  
s
// save changes  
File “a:user\bindata.ini” was saved.  
// Next section is displayed  
section [BUI]  
BUI idle timeout in minutes: 30  
Modify, Save, Cancel: // re-prompt for action  
// Command terminated (section FTP is last), current CLI menu is displayed:  
PSWeditor, FUpgrade, SWupgrade, ?  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A: Password security 231  
Application Protocol Port Numbers  
Refer to Table 62 for the port numbers to use with the specific  
application protocol.  
Table 62  
Application Protocol Port Numbers  
Application  
Telnet  
Port Number  
23  
FTP  
21, 20  
SMTP  
25  
HTTP  
80  
Dual ICB cards  
3700 (uses proprietary port)  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
232 Appendix A: Password security  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
233  
Appendix B: Product integrity  
Environmental specifications  
ICB environmental requirements meet, or exceed, Meridian system  
requirements. The power provided for each card slot in the IPE module  
exceeds the power requirements for an ICB. Table 63 shows the range  
of acceptable temperatures and humidity for the ICB.  
Table 63  
ICB environmental specifications  
Specification  
Minimum  
Maximum  
Normal Operation  
Recommended  
Temperature  
15° C  
30° C  
Relative humidity  
10%  
55%  
(non-condensing)  
Absolute  
Temperature  
Relative humidity  
0° C  
45° C  
5% to  
95%  
(non-condensing)  
Rate of change  
Long Term  
Less than 1° C per 3 minutes  
Storage  
Temperature  
- 40° C  
70° C  
Relative humidity  
0%  
95%  
(non-condensing)  
- 40° C to 70° C, non-condensing  
Short Term (less than 72 hr.)  
Temperature  
- 40° C  
70° C  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
234 Appendix B: Product integrity  
Table 63  
ICB environmental specifications (Continued)  
Specification  
Minimum  
Maximum  
25° C  
Temperature Shock  
In three minutes  
In three minutes  
- 40° C to  
25° C to  
70° C  
- 40° to 70° C, non-condensing  
Regulatory standards  
The following tables list the safety and electro-magnetic compatibility  
regulatory standards for the ICB, by geographic region. Specifications  
for the ICB meet, or exceed, the standards listed in the regulations for  
these regions.  
Safety  
Table 64 provides a list of safety regulations met by the ICB, and the  
type of regulation and the country or region covered by each regulation.  
Table 64  
Safety regulations  
Regulation Identifier  
UL 60950  
Regulatory Agency  
Safety, United States, CALA  
Safety, Canada  
CSA 22.2 225  
EN 41003, FCC part 68  
EN 60950/IEC 60950  
BAKOM SR 784.103.12/4.1/1  
AS3260, TS001 - TS004, TS006  
JATE  
Safety, International Telecom  
Safety, International  
EMC/Safety (Switzerland)  
Safety/Network (Australia)  
Safety/Network (Japan)  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix B: Product integrity 235  
Electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC)  
Table 65 lists electro-magnetic emissions regulations met by the ICB  
card, along with the standard that lists each regulation.  
Table 65  
Electro-magnetic emissions  
Regulation Identifier  
FCC part 15B Class A  
CSA C108.8  
Regulatory Agency  
United States Radiated Emissions  
Canada Radiated Emissions  
EN50081-1 EN300-386 V1.3.2  
European Community Generic  
Emission Standard  
EN55022/CISPR 22 CLASS A  
BAKOM SR 784.103.12/4.1/1  
SS-447-20-22  
Radiated Emissions (Basic Std.)  
EMC/Safety (Switzerland)  
Sweden EMC standard  
AS/NZS 3548  
EMC (Australia/New Zealand)  
France EMC standard  
NFC 98020  
Table 66 lists electro-magnetic immunity regulations met by the ICB  
card, along with the standard that lists each regulation.  
Table 66  
Electro-magnetic immunity  
Regulation Identifier  
Regulatory Agency  
CISPR 22 Sec. 20 Class A  
EN300-368 V1.3.2 EN61000-4-2  
EN300-386 V1.3.2 EN61000-4-3  
EN300-386 V1.3.2 EN61000-4-4  
I/O conducted noise  
ESD (Basic Standard)  
Radiated Immunity (Basic Standard)  
Fast transient/Burst Immunity (Basic  
Standard)  
EN300-386 V1.3.2 EN61000-4-5  
EN300-386 V1.3.2 EN61000-4-6  
Surge Immunity (Basic Standard)  
Conducted Disturbances (Basic  
Standard)  
BAKOM SR 784.103.12/4.1/1  
SS-447-20-22  
EMC/Safety (Switzerland)  
Sweden EMC standard  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
236 Appendix B: Product integrity  
Table 66  
Electro-magnetic immunity (Continued)  
Regulation Identifier  
AS/NZS 3548l  
Regulatory Agency  
EMC (Australia/New Zealand)  
France EMC standard  
NFC 98020  
FCC Compliance  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for  
a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules, and the  
radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of  
Communications. These limits are designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated  
in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can  
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a  
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the  
user will be required to correct the interference at the user’s own  
expense. Allowing this equipment to be operated in such a manner as  
to not provide for proper answer supervision is a violation of Part 68 of  
the FCC Rules, Docket No. 89-114, 55FR46066.  
MTBF  
The ICB MTBF will be better than 50 years for ground benign (GB) and  
40° C ambient.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
237  
List of terms  
ACD  
Automatic Call Distribution.  
Browser User Interface  
An interface that allows the administration of OA&M functions on  
conferences, users, and cards through a standard web browser.  
BUI  
See Browser User Interface.  
Chairperson DN  
The directory number the conference chairperson dials to enter the  
conference.  
CLI  
See Command Line Interface.  
CLS  
Class of Service.  
Command Line Interface  
An interface that allows the administration of OA&M functions on  
cards through telnet or through a standard VT100 terminal.  
CPU  
Central Processing Unit. A chip that performs logic, control, and  
arithmetic functions. The part of the switch that performs these  
functions and any others necessary to process calls.  
DID  
DLC  
DN  
Direct Inward Dialing.  
Digital Line Card.  
Directory Number.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
238 List of terms  
DRAM  
Dynamic Random Access Memory. A high density type of  
semi-conductor memory. It typically has slower access time than  
SRAM and requires external memory refresh circuitry.  
DSP  
Digital Signal Processing. A specialized computer chip that performs  
speedy and complex operations on digitized waveforms. Useful in  
processing sound and video.  
DTMF  
EMC  
Dual Tone Multi-frequency. A term describing push-button or  
touch-tone dialing.  
Electro-Magnetic Compatibility. Refers to equipment units that  
perform their functions without causing or suffering unacceptable  
electromagnetic interference from other equipment in the same  
environment.  
EMI  
Electro-Magnetic Interference. Unwanted electromagnetic coupling,  
such as a ham radio heard on an electric organ or church music  
heard in hearing aids. Also known as “static”.  
Firmware  
Hardwired logic, software, data, and programming instructions such  
as that stored by threading wires through ferrite cores. May also refer  
to software programmed in the factory or burnt in the field, and is  
semi-permanently stored within ROM.  
Flash memory  
Electrically erasable memory that is non-volatile (not affected by  
power disruptions).  
FTP  
HTTP  
ICB  
File Transfer Protocol.  
Hypertext Transfer Protocol.  
Integrated Conference Bridge.  
Internet Protocol.  
IP  
IPE  
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment. A range of cards that contain micro-  
processors that provide off-loading of the CPU function and the  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of terms 239  
flexibility to make changes to the system's parameters without  
revising the hardware.  
ISM  
Incremental Software Management.  
Local Area Network.  
LAN  
LED  
LEN  
Light Emitting Diode.  
Line Equipment Number (CS 2100/Meridian SL-100 equivalent of  
TN).  
Main DN  
MAP  
The directory number that conferees dial to enter the conference  
when using direct access.  
Maintenance and Administration Position.  
MAU  
MMI  
Medium Access Unit.  
Man-Machine Interface.  
Microprocessor Unit.  
MPU  
MTBF  
Mean Time Between Failure. A measure of reliability: the time that a  
user may reasonably expect a device or system to work before an  
incapacitating fault occurs. Also, the average number of hours  
between one random failure and the next under stated conditions.  
MTTR  
OA&M  
ONP  
Mean Time To Repair.  
Operations, Administration, and Maintenance.  
One Night Process. This is a term to define upgrades that occur over  
a single night when traffic is slower than during the day.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
240 List of terms  
PBX  
Private Branch Exchange. A telephony switch that is privately owned.  
Pulse Code Modulation.  
PCM  
PCMCIA  
Personal Computer Memory Card International Association. This  
organization has defined a credit card sized plug-in board for use in  
PCs. These cards are the only way to get to a laptop bus without  
using a docking station. In addition, application software can be  
stored on the card into system address space so that the software  
can run directly from the card, resulting in a faster start and less  
memory required from the host computer.  
RTS  
Return To Service.  
SCSI  
Small Computer System Interface. A device that enables computers  
to cable-connect to networks or external tape units/hard drives.  
SDI  
Serial Data Interface. For some Meridian switches, provides ports  
between the CPU and external devices such as a teletype or  
maintenance telephone. More generally, an SDI is a mechanism for  
changing the parallel arrangement of data within computers to the  
serial form used on transmission lines and vice versa.  
SDN  
Secondary Directory Number.  
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol.  
SMTP  
Telephone User Interface  
An interface that allows the scheduling of simple conferences over a  
DTMF telephone.  
TN  
Terminal Number (CS 1000 equivalent of LEN).  
See Telephone User Interface.  
TUI  
.WAV  
File format used for storing voice files created under Microsoft  
Windows.  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
List of terms 241  
XPM  
Extended Peripheral Module.  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge Service Implementation Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
242 List of terms  
553-3001-358/555-4001-135 Standard 02.00 July 2006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Nortel Communication Server 2100/Meridian SL-100  
Nortel Integrated Conference Bridge  
Service Implementation Guide  
Copyright © 2006 Nortel Networks. All rights reserved.  
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. The statements, configurations,  
technical data, and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable, but are  
presented without express or implied warranty. Users must take full responsibility for their applications of  
any products specified in this document. The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks.  
Nortel, Nortel (Logo), the Globemark, SL-1, Meridian 1, and Succession are trademarks of Nortel Networks.  
Publication number: 553-3001-358  
Product release: ICB Release 4  
Document release: Standard 02.00  
Date: July 2006  
Produced in Canada  
To provide feedback or report a problem in this document, go to www.nortel.com/documentfeedback.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Miele Clothes Dryer t 294 c User Manual
Miele Ventilation Hood da 186 User Manual
Miele Washer W2859iWPM SUPERTRONIC User Manual
MTX Audio Car Speaker P2400 User Manual
Navini Networks Network Card Ripwave User Manual
Nexus 21 Computer Hardware 1066MT s Interposer User Manual
Omega Vehicle Security Computer Monitor DPiTH i8DH User Manual
Omnimount Indoor Furnishings AB2 User Manual
Ositech comm Network Card 614006 001 User Manual
Parker Products Network Card COMPAX M S L User Manual